DeLorme | Topo North America 10.0 | User guide | DeLorme Topo North America 10.0 User guide

Topo USA User Guide
Table of Contents
Getting Started ........................................................................................................ 1
Welcome to DeLorme Topo North America ................................................................ 1
Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................... 2
How do I? ............................................................................................................ 7
Basic Functions ..................................................................................................... 9
Running DeLorme Topo North America ..................................................................... 9
Zooming In and Out .............................................................................................. 9
Panning/Centering the Map ................................................................................... 11
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard ........................................................................ 12
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image ............................................................... 12
Measuring Distance and Area ................................................................................ 14
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats .................................................................. 15
Searching Tips .................................................................................................... 17
Exiting the Program ............................................................................................. 18
About the Interface ............................................................................................. 19
Tab Area ............................................................................................................ 19
Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 19
Overview Map ..................................................................................................... 20
Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 21
Using the Help System ......................................................................................... 21
Help Overview .................................................................................................... 21
Using the Help System ......................................................................................... 23
Help Documentation Conventions .......................................................................... 25
Glossary Terms ................................................................................................... 26
Recreational Contacts .......................................................................................... 33
Map Legend........................................................................................................ 43
iii
Topo USA User Guide
Using the Toolbar ................................................................................................... 49
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options ............................................................................ 49
Reordering the Toolbar Options ............................................................................. 49
To Create a New Project ....................................................................................... 49
To Open a Project ............................................................................................... 49
To Save a Project ................................................................................................ 50
To Open the Map Library ...................................................................................... 50
To Share Maps .................................................................................................... 50
To Create a Route ............................................................................................... 50
To Sync Files and Information with a Handheld GPS Device ....................................... 52
To Measure Distance............................................................................................ 52
To Get Information About a Location ...................................................................... 52
To Create a Profile ............................................................................................... 53
To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location ............................................................. 54
To Choose Options .............................................................................................. 54
To Grab and Pan the Map ..................................................................................... 55
To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection ....................................................................... 55
To Use GPS NavMode........................................................................................... 56
To Print ............................................................................................................. 56
To Print the Map Screen ....................................................................................... 57
Customizing the Map and Tab Display ....................................................................... 59
Display Options Overview ..................................................................................... 59
Customizing the Interface..................................................................................... 59
Displaying Basic Map Features .............................................................................. 60
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences ............................................................... 63
Changing the Map Colors ...................................................................................... 65
Showing Hybrid Maps .......................................................................................... 65
Changing the Map Magnification Level .................................................................... 66
iv
Table of Contents
Changing the Contour Details Preferences ............................................................... 66
Changing How POIs Display on the Map .................................................................. 67
Setting Units of Measure Preferences ..................................................................... 68
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ............................................................................ 71
Viewing Two Maps at the Same Time ..................................................................... 73
Showing or Hiding Tabs........................................................................................ 75
Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences ........................................................ 76
Reordering the Tabs ............................................................................................ 77
Using Keyboard Shortcuts ....................................................................................... 79
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme .................................................................. 79
Creating a New Custom Scheme ............................................................................ 79
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme .................................................. 80
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme ........................................................................... 82
Renaming a Custom Scheme ................................................................................ 82
Deleting a Custom Scheme ................................................................................... 83
Importing a Custom Scheme................................................................................. 83
Exporting a Custom Scheme ................................................................................. 84
Searching For Commands ..................................................................................... 84
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme ......................................................... 85
Viewing Map Data .................................................................................................. 87
Saving Data to Your Hard Drive ............................................................................. 87
Connecting Data ................................................................................................. 87
Viewing Data ...................................................................................................... 87
Using Projects and Map Files .................................................................................... 89
Projects and Map Files Overview ............................................................................ 89
Creating and Deleting Projects .............................................................................. 89
Opening an Existing Project .................................................................................. 90
Editing a Project.................................................................................................. 91
v
Topo USA User Guide
Saving a Project .................................................................................................. 92
Creating Transfer Files ......................................................................................... 92
Importing Transfer Files ....................................................................................... 94
Emailing a Transfer File ........................................................................................ 95
Finding a Location on the Map.................................................................................. 97
Find Options ....................................................................................................... 97
Find Overview ..................................................................................................... 98
Performing a Basic Search .................................................................................... 98
Performing an Advanced Search ........................................................................... 100
Performing a POI Search ..................................................................................... 103
Finding Points of Interest Near Your Current Location .............................................. 104
Tutorial: Find Points of Interest on a Route ............................................................ 106
Finding a Symbol by its Name .............................................................................. 108
Tips on Viewing Search Results ............................................................................ 109
Keywords for Category Searches .......................................................................... 110
MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting ................................................ 114
Using Address Book Contacts .................................................................................. 117
Searching for Address Book Contacts .................................................................... 117
Importing Existing Address Book Information ......................................................... 117
Manually Entering Address Book Information .......................................................... 118
Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact ...................................................... 119
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book ................................................................. 120
Manually Moving a Contact on the Map .................................................................. 120
Relocating Address Book Contacts ........................................................................ 121
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book ............................................................... 121
Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map ................................................. 122
Deleting Your Entire Address Book ........................................................................ 123
Exporting Your Address Book ............................................................................... 123
vi
Table of Contents
Printing ............................................................................................................... 125
Printing a Map ................................................................................................... 125
Printing a Route and Directions ............................................................................ 126
Printing a Profile ................................................................................................ 128
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map .................................................................... 129
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map......................................................... 132
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map ....................................................... 133
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map ...................................... 134
Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map .................................................... 135
Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map .................................................................. 135
Using the Draw Tools ............................................................................................. 141
Draw Overview .................................................................................................. 141
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools .................................................................................. 146
Draw File Management ........................................................................................ 146
Creating a New Draw File .................................................................................... 146
Saving a Draw File ............................................................................................. 147
Deleting a Draw File ........................................................................................... 148
Hiding Draw Files ............................................................................................... 148
Editing/Locking Draw Files ................................................................................... 149
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files ......................................................................... 149
Exporting Track Data Files to Text Files ................................................................. 150
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files ....................................................... 151
Importing Files to Draw Files................................................................................ 151
Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File ...................................................... 154
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File ........................................................................ 156
Saving a Track as a GPS Log ................................................................................ 156
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File ...................................................................... 157
Copying a Draw File ............................................................................................ 159
vii
Topo USA User Guide
Changing Draw Object Types ............................................................................... 159
Renaming a Draw File ......................................................................................... 161
Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object ............................................................ 161
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another ............................................ 161
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File ........................................................ 162
Using Draw Objects ............................................................................................ 163
Copying and Placing Draw Objects ........................................................................ 163
Moving Draw Objects .......................................................................................... 164
Renaming a Draw Object ..................................................................................... 165
Deleting Draw Objects ........................................................................................ 166
Snapping Draw Objects ....................................................................................... 168
Adding Points to Draw Objects ............................................................................. 169
Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects ............................................ 170
Labeling a Draw Object ....................................................................................... 170
Routable Roads, Trails, Tracks, Lines, Arcs , and Splines .......................................... 171
Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map ......................................................... 171
Drawing a Line, Arc, or Spline on the Map .............................................................. 172
Drawing a Track on the Map ................................................................................ 174
Tutorial: Convert Tracks into Trails ....................................................................... 175
Editing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline ..................................... 177
Editing a Track................................................................................................... 178
Placing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline at a Specific Location ....... 179
Joining and Breaking Linear Objects ...................................................................... 180
Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons ......................................................................... 181
Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map ................................................ 181
Editing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon................................................................... 182
Placing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map .................................................. 183
Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and Images ........................................ 184
viii
Table of Contents
Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image to the Map ..................... 184
Editing a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image .................................... 186
Placing a Waypoint, Symbol, Text Label, or Image at a Specific Location .................... 187
Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes .................................................................... 188
Custom Symbols ................................................................................................ 189
Custom Symbols Overview .................................................................................. 189
Creating a New Symbol ....................................................................................... 190
GPS Device Custom Symbols ............................................................................... 191
Editing a Symbol ................................................................................................ 193
Finding a Custom Symbol .................................................................................... 194
Importing a Bitmap ............................................................................................ 195
Copying and Pasting ........................................................................................... 196
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym ................................................................................. 197
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym .............................................................................. 198
Removing a Symbol ............................................................................................ 199
Draw Tool Box ................................................................................................... 200
Using the Transparency Option............................................................................. 201
Anchor Position .................................................................................................. 201
Cursor Position .................................................................................................. 202
Creating a New Symbol Set ................................................................................. 203
Opening a Symbol Set ........................................................................................ 203
Routing ............................................................................................................... 205
Creating a Route ................................................................................................ 205
Tutorial: Create a Route ...................................................................................... 207
Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias ..................................................................... 209
Changing the Routing Method .............................................................................. 212
Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route ................................................ 213
Viewing Route Directions ..................................................................................... 213
ix
Topo USA User Guide
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing ................................................................ 214
Saving Route Directions as Text ........................................................................... 215
Setting Your Routing Preferences.......................................................................... 216
Editing a Route .................................................................................................. 217
Editing Roads .................................................................................................... 219
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote .................................................................. 219
Moving Route MapNotes ...................................................................................... 220
Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map .......................................................... 220
Saving a Route .................................................................................................. 221
Deleting a Route ................................................................................................ 222
Importing Routes ............................................................................................... 222
Tutorial: Plan a Long Distance Trip........................................................................ 222
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences................................................ 226
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route .................................................................. 227
Converting a Route to a GPS Log .......................................................................... 227
Using GPS ............................................................................................................ 229
GPS Overview .................................................................................................... 229
GPS Options/Initializing GPS ................................................................................ 229
Using NavMode or Tab View ................................................................................. 233
Tutorial: Route with GPS—NavMode ...................................................................... 235
Tutorial: Route with GPS—Tab View ...................................................................... 239
Tracking a Route with GPS .................................................................................. 241
Getting Back on Track When Off Course ................................................................ 242
Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking ................................................. 242
Playing Back a Log File ........................................................................................ 243
Previewing a GPS Log File.................................................................................... 244
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log ......................................................................... 245
Monitoring Your GPS Status ................................................................................. 246
x
Table of Contents
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information ..................................................................... 247
Viewing Sun and Moon Information ....................................................................... 249
About GPS ........................................................................................................ 249
Using Voice Navigation .......................................................................................... 253
Voice Overview .................................................................................................. 253
Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition ........................................................ 254
Voice Commands ............................................................................................... 255
Voice Prompts ................................................................................................... 259
Voice Options .................................................................................................... 259
Voice Options .................................................................................................... 260
Training the Speech Recognition Engine ................................................................ 260
Speech Recognition Tips ...................................................................................... 261
Changing Voice Output ....................................................................................... 263
Voice Preferences ............................................................................................... 264
Geocaching .......................................................................................................... 267
Geocaching Menu ............................................................................................... 267
Geocaching Overview.......................................................................................... 268
Managing Pocket Queries .................................................................................... 269
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices .................................................................. 271
PN-Series GPS Overview ..................................................................................... 271
Syncing Maps and Data ....................................................................................... 271
Sync Overview ................................................................................................... 271
Syncing Maps, Points, Routes, and Tracks .............................................................. 272
Tutorial: Add a Map to an Earthmate PN-Series GPS ................................................ 274
Tutorial: Sync Data with a PN-Series GPS .............................................................. 278
Deleting Files from a PN-Series GPS ...................................................................... 282
Sync Options ..................................................................................................... 282
Firmware Updates .............................................................................................. 283
xi
Topo USA User Guide
Creating Custom Map Packages ............................................................................ 284
Creating a Custom Map Package ........................................................................... 284
Grid Size Comparisons ........................................................................................ 287
Data Zoom Level/Scale Bar Translation ................................................................. 288
Using Third-party GPS Devices ................................................................................ 291
Sending Route Information .................................................................................. 291
Sending Tracks .................................................................................................. 292
Sending Waypoints ............................................................................................. 293
Receiving a Route .............................................................................................. 294
Receiving a Track ............................................................................................... 295
Receiving Waypoints ........................................................................................... 296
Using Small-screen Devices .................................................................................... 299
Using Small-screen Devices ................................................................................. 299
Profiling Linear Objects .......................................................................................... 301
Creating a Profile ............................................................................................... 301
Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs ..................................................................... 302
Statistical Data .................................................................................................. 305
Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation ................................................. 308
Clearing a Profile ................................................................................................ 308
User Profile Data ................................................................................................ 309
Viewing Your Map in 3-D ........................................................................................ 313
Viewing a 3-D Map ............................................................................................. 313
Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences ........................................................................ 315
Flying Over a 3-D Map ........................................................................................ 316
Tutorial: Fly in 3-D ............................................................................................. 317
Using NetLink and MapShare .................................................................................. 321
NetLink Overview ............................................................................................... 321
Tutorial: Share Maps .......................................................................................... 321
xii
Table of Contents
Using GeoTagger .................................................................................................. 327
Getting Started with GeoTagger ........................................................................... 327
Tagging an Image .............................................................................................. 327
Tagging Data ..................................................................................................... 329
Calculate the Timestamp Offset ............................................................................ 330
Legal Information ................................................................................................. 333
DeLorme Topo North America 10.0 Single-User License Agreement ........................... 333
Important Notices .............................................................................................. 338
Apache License, Version 2.0 ................................................................................ 345
Index .................................................................................................................. 351
xiii
Getting Started
Welcome to DeLorme Topo North America
Helpful Links
•
DeLorme—product information and more
•
Technical Support—searchable knowledge base, articles, troubleshooting
•
Community Forums—a wealth of information from the people who use our
products
•
DeLorme Weblog—announcements, tips and tricks, and tutorials
What's New
•
Updated road and trail data in the US and Canada including more than 800,000 new
road names in the US.
•
Updated with hi-detail lake, river and stream data for all 50 states.
•
Includes elevation data for all of Mexico and updated elevation data for Alaska.
•
Now includes park data in Canada, 38 National Parks and 100 popular Provincial
Parks.
DeLorme Topo North America Features
These are just some of the many features that you can enjoy with DeLorme Topo North
America:
•
Try our data downloads for free! Included with your purchase is a download
certificate for $40 worth of data and imagery using the NetLink tab (registration
required). You can also subscribe to the DeLorme Map Library and get unlimited
downloads for an annual fee of only $29.95.
•
Use the Handheld Export tab to create custom maps to send to your Earthmate PNSeries GPS.
•
Search for trails, state parks, mountain peaks, unique natural features, points of
interest, and more.
•
View your maps in 3-D and fly over the terrain with shaded relief, detailed land
use/land cover features, and elevation contours.
•
Use the split-screen functionality to view two types of data for the same location at
the same time.
1
Topo USA User Guide
•
Create trail, road, or direct routes by adding start and finish points on your map.
Customize your route by adding stops and vias.
•
Use the toolbar to share maps, add data and images to the map, open/create/save
projects, start/stop GPS, edit your preferences, and more.
•
Profile map items and objects you draw/add to the map to determine coordinate
information, linear distance, elevation, grade, and so on.
•
Print high quality, detailed, 2-D or 3-D single-page maps, and/or mural maps as
large as 3 x 3 pages. You can even print routes, route directions, and profiles.
•
Create custom keyboard shortcuts or select a DeLorme shortcut scheme, such as 3-D
Navigation, to navigate the program more easily than ever.
•
Connect your GPS device to the program and track your progress on a laptop as you
travel.
•
And much more!
Frequently Asked Questions
These questions are asked most frequently by our customers.
Click a question to reveal its answer. To hide the answer, click the question again.
•
How do I get maps from DeLorme Topo North America to my Earthmate PN-Series
GPS device?
To get started, see these tutorials:
Tutorial: Add a Map to Your PN-Series GPS
Tutorial: Sync Data with a PN-Series GPS
To learn how to make a custom map, see Creating a Custom Map Package.
For more information, see the PN-Series GPS Help topics under Using Earthmate PNSeries GPS Devices.
•
Is my GPS device supported?
DeLorme software works with different types of GPS devices.
•
DeLorme Earthmate GPS Handheld Devices—DeLorme Topo North
America 10.0 supports DeLorme Earthmate PN-30 and higher models.
•
DeLorme Earthmate GPS Laptop Devices—LT-40 (and previous versions)
and BT-20 for laptops.
2
Getting Started
•
USB GPS Support—DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB
GPS if the device meets one of the following criteria:
•
When the GPS is attached to the computer, it is recognized and
displayed under Ports in the Microsoft® Windows® Device Manager.
•
The unit is a Garmin USB device and the Garmin drivers are installed.
Note Magellan USB devices are not currently supported.
•
Serial GPS Support—DeLorme software can use the data output from a
serial GPS device. The device must be connected to a free COM port and
output a generic NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association) stream.
•
Bluetooth GPS Support—DeLorme software can use the data output from a
Bluetooth GPS device. You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a
virtual serial port.
•
How do I find a specific location?
Use DeLorme Topo North America's search tools to locate places and points of
interest (POIs) in the United States and Canada and places in Mexico.
In addition, you can search for places along your route, within a certain radius of the
current map center, or within a particular region.
To access the search features in DeLorme Topo North America, click the Find tab.
For more information on searching for specific locations, see Performing a Basic
Search, Finding Points of Interest Near Your Current Location, Performing a POI
Search, and Performing an Advanced Search.
•
How can I find all of the nearby points of interest?
Right-click your location on the map, click Find Travel POIs, and then click the
distance you want to search within (1 mile, 5 miles, or 10 miles). The points of
interest display in Find tab results area.
OR
If you are tracking with a GPS device, do a radar search to locate points of interest
within a designated distance of your current GPS position.
•
Where do I find the map settings and other Options settings?
Click the Options button
on the toolbar to modify GPS, sync, voice, map
feature, display, keyboard shortcut, and 3-D preferences. For more information, see
To Choose Options.
3
Topo USA User Guide
•
How do I perform an Along the Way search in the Find tab and print my results?
Search for names or categories along your current route by performing an advanced
search in the Find tab. You can then print your search results using the Along the
Way print option.
Use the following steps to search for a name/category along your current route and
print the results:
•
•
1. Click the Find tab and then click Advanced. The Advanced dialog area
displays.
2. Select Category from the From drop-down list.
3. Select Current Route from the Within drop-down list.
4. Type the appropriate keyword in the Keywords text box.
5. Type the distance in the Distance text box.
6. Click Search.
The search results display in the dialog area.
7. Click the Print tab and then click Route. The Route dialog area displays.
8. Select the Along the Way check box.
9. Click Print Now.
The search results print.
How do I submit a data update or fix the roads on my map?
•
•
If you find there is a missing local road, you can add it to the current Draw
layer using the Routable Roads Draw tool. For more information, see Drawing
Routable Roads or Trails on the Map.
•
To report an error to DeLorme:
•
1. Click the NetLink tab.
2. Click the Support subtab.
3. In the Map Corrections box, click the Submit Correction link.
4. Use the Customer Revisions wizard to submit the change.
•
What is a project?
You can save all of your work as a single workspace so you can open it again later.
These saved workspaces are called projects.
A project is made up of the following items: coordinates of the map center, current
zoom level, current magnification, map display preferences, any added items: such
as draw layers, routes, and so on. As you create new routes or draw layers, change
4
Getting Started
preferences or the map center, and so on, they are added to the current project. You
can save or discard changes.
To learn how to create a project, see Creating and Deleting Projects.
•
What is the difference between a stop and a via?
When routing in DeLorme Topo North America, you have the option of
adding/inserting stops or vias in the route. A stop is a location in a route where you
want to stop and then proceed from. A via is a location on the map that you want the
route to use.
For example, if you create a route between Portland, Maine, and Yarmouth, Maine,
with no stops or vias, the route directions will tell you to take I-295. However, if you
want to take US Route 1 instead, you can place vias in the route on US Route 1 to
force the route to go by way of US Route 1. If you plan on stopping in Falmouth
Foreside for lunch, you will want your route directions to reflect that stop. When you
add a stop, you can recalculate to include it.
This map shows the area between Portland, Maine, and Yarmouth, Maine, with two
vias and one stop.
•
What's the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via?
5
Topo USA User Guide
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route.
The Add Stop/Via function adds stops/vias in the order you add them to the route.
For more information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
•
Why did my route fail to calculate?
Your route will fail to calculate if you create a route:
•
•
With a route start, stop, via, or finish point in an area that you have
designated as a Route Avoid.
•
That includes route points outside the United States. If you have the North
American version of DeLorme Topo North America, for routes that include
points outside of the United States, Canada, or Mexico.
•
On an island without roads. In this case, DeLorme Topo North America looks
for the nearest road to that island to place the route point. If the nearest road
is not routable (for example, it is the only road on the island and/or the island
does not have ferry access), you will get an error message saying, "Route
failed to calculate."
•
Why do X marks sometimes display on the map when I calculate a route?
•
When you place a route point in a location that isn't on a street, DeLorme
Topo North America finds the closest street to that location, marks the space
between the point you clicked and the street with X marks, and starts the
route at the street.
•
If you search for an address that is on a walkway and place a route point on
it, DeLorme Topo North America finds the closest street to that location,
marks the space between the point the clicked and the street with X marks,
and starts the route at the street.
•
Why is the tab area and control panel so narrow?
DeLorme Topo North America was designed for resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher. If
you are using a very high resolution (such as 1920x 1200), the tab area and control
panel may appear to be very narrow. You can modify the size of the map and tab
area or use the Windows® Control Panel to adjust your display settings.
•
6
What's the best way to measure the distance of a road or trail?
Getting Started
The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to create a
route. You can create a route using right-click functionality, the toolbar, or the Route
tab. For more information, see Creating a Route.
•
What's the best way to measure a large area on the map?
The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the area tools on the Draw
tab (such as the polygon tool). When you draw an area object on the map, the area
displays next to the object on the map. If you click off the object, you can view the
area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area
object on the map. For more information about drawing area objects, see Drawing a
Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map.
•
What's the best way to measure a short distance on the map?
The best way to measure a short distance (that is not made up of a road/trail) on the
map is to use the Measure tool
on the toolbar. You can measure linear distance
and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options
dialog box. For instructions on using the measure tool, see Measuring Distance and
Area.
•
Why won't 3-D billboards display?
If you receive a message saying that 3-D billboards cannot be displayed, ensure that
you have a 32 MB video card with the most recent drivers and that it supports
DirectX and transparencies.
How do I?
Click a question to open the related Help topic. See also, Frequently Asked Questions.
Controlling the Map
How do I pan the map?
How do I zoom the map in and out?
How do I change the map view to show the left map view, right map view, or both?
Display Preferences
How do I change the map colors?
Draw Tools
How do I add a road or trail to my map?
7
Topo USA User Guide
Earthmate PN-Series GPS
How do I use my mapping application with my PN-Series GPS?
Searching for a Location
How do I search for a location?
GPS
How do I start tracking with my GPS device?
Map Data
How do I work without the DVD?
How do I switch the data that displays in the left map window?
Map Files
What is a project?
Routing
How do I create a route?
How do I track a route with my GPS receiver?
How can I automatically recalculate my route when I'm off course?
How can I avoid a specific area when routing?
Printing
How do I print a map?
Profile
How do I view a profile of a route I've created?
1. Center the route you want to profile on the map.
2. Click the Profile tab.
3. Select a route on the map to generate its profile. When the object is selected, it is
highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile dialog area.
3-D
How do I generate a 3-D map?
How can I expand my 3-D map to fit the entire screen?
8
Getting Started
Basic Functions
Running DeLorme Topo North America
After you install the program, you can run it with the DVD to use the data without installing
it to your computer's hard drive. For more information on installing data to your hard drive,
see Saving Data to Your Hard Drive.
To Access Data from the DVD
Choose one of the following ways to access the data using the DVD.
If you installed a desktop shortcut, insert a DeLorme Topo North America DVD into
•
your computer's DVD drive and then double-click the DeLorme Topo North
America 10.0 icon.
OR
•
Insert a DeLorme Topo North America DVD into your DVD drive. Click Start, point to
Programs > DeLorme > Topo North America 10.0, and then click DeLorme
Topo North America 10.0.
Zooming In and Out
You can use the drag and zoom feature, zoom tools, or the data zoom level(Data zoom level
is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists in reality. It is the
amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor. The data zoom level is similar
to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper maps. For example, 1:24,000,
1:100,000, 1:500,000, and so on.) to quickly change the zoom level of the map view.
Notes
•
Increase the data zoom level number to show a smaller geographic area at greater
detail.
•
Decrease the data zoom level number to show a larger geographic area at lesser
detail.
•
If you view both the right (primary) and left (secondary) maps at different data
zoom levels, a box (or lines, depending on the current data zoom level) displays on
the map that is zoomed out the furthest. The box/lines indicate the area that is in
view on the other map.
•
If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not
equally represented on the screen (50/50), a box (or lines) displays on the map that
9
Topo USA User Guide
is covering the most screen area. The box/lines indicate the area that is in view on
the other map.
To Drag and Zoom In
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a down-right
direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display. A view box displays
on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse. A label displays the
data zoom level at the current map center.
2. Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display, release the
mouse button. The area you selected fills the map window, the map re-centers, and
the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail.
Tip To move the view box to another location, press the SHIFT key at any time.
To Drag and Zoom Out
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an up-left
direction on the map. A staircase with a small circle displays on the screen.
2. Continue dragging the mouse in an up-left direction. The small circle moves up the
steps, one step per data zoom level. A label displays the data zoom level to the
bottom-right of the staircase.
3. Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display, release the mouse button.
The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail. The map center is
retained on your screen.
To Zoom In/Out Using the Zoom Tools
There are two sets of zoom tools. The zoom tools for the right map are located in the
Control Panel. The zoom tools for the left map are located at the top of the left map view.
Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom level at a
time. Click the down arrow to zoom in one minor data zoom
Right
Map
Controls
level at a time.
Click the Zoom In 1 tool to increase the detail number to the
next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail number to the
10
Getting Started
next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail number by
three full levels.
Click the plus button to increase the detail number to the next
full level.
Left
Click the minus button to decrease the detail number to the
Map
Controls
next full level.
The data zoom level of the left map displays in the text area to
the left of the buttons.
Tips
•
Press ALT+PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom level.
Press ALT+PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full data zoom
level.
•
Use the mouse wheel to zoom the map in and out. Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom
in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while rotating the
mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level.
Panning/Centering the Map
Use any of the following methods to pan (move) or center the map.
•
Click anywhere on the map. The point you click becomes the new map center.
•
When you point near the map edge, a white hand displays. Drag the hand to move
the map in that direction.
•
With your cursor anywhere on the map, press the CTRL key on your keyboard—the
cursor becomes a white hand. Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to
a new location.
•
Click the Map Panning button
on the toolbar to drag/pan the 2-D or 3-D map in
any direction.
•
Click anywhere on the overview map. The point you click becomes the new map
center. This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse click than you
can within the main map.
11
Topo USA User Guide
•
Point anywhere on the black view box in the overview map window. When the
pointer becomes a
, drag the view box to the new location.
•
Use the search features on the Find tab to center the map on a particular location.
•
Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up, down, left, or right in small increments.
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard
Click the Copy to Clipboard button
on the Print tab to copy your map to the clipboard.
You can then paste it into another program.
You can also right-click anywhere on the map and click Copy Map to Clipboard.
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image
You can save the current map view as a bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG (.jpg) image in all page
layout formats: Single, 2 x 2, and 3 x 3. If you select a multi-page format, all the active
pages are saved as individual bitmaps or JPEGs. The file name is the specified file name
with an incremental page number at the end.
See Printing a Map for information about printing a map without saving it as a file.
To Save a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG
Use the following steps to save a map as an image.
1. Locate the area on the map that you want to save as an image.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab (if it is not already selected).
3. Under Map, select Left, Right, or Both.
4. Under Print Layout, select Page(the map print area is based on the paper size
specified in the Setup options) or Screen(the map print area is based on the screen
size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a Screen
map displays as a blue box on the overview map.
5. If you selected Page in step 4, the following options are available.
12
Getting Started
•
Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3). The
print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map. In the example
below, 2 x 2 is selected. This means the print area encompasses four
standard pages at whatever paper size you specified in the Setup options. You
can assemble a multi-page map into a large map.
•
If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 and do not want to save all the pages in the
multi-page map on the map layout graphic, click each page you do not want
to save. The page appears dimmed or gray. In the example below, page 4 will
not print.
•
Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save. If not, pan the
map to the location and zoom to the level you want.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges/reduces the map features and
changes the map area that you save as an image. If you increase the photo
zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc. are larger and your map area is
reduced. If you decrease the photo zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc.
are smaller and your map area is enlarged. The reduction/enlargement
percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom dropdown list.
•
If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print
area, print photo zoom, or other settings, select the Lock Print Center check
box. This locks the print area and changes the tab label to red.
•
Add text or graphics to your map.
13
Topo USA User Guide
•
Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire
area that will be saved as a bitmap image. Clear the check box to return to
your previous data zoom level.
6. Click the Save button
.
The Save 2D Map Image dialog box opens.
7. Type the file name in the File Name text box, select to save the file as a .bmp or
.jpg from the Save as Type drop-down list, select the DPI (dots per inch) value
(optional), and click Save.
Measuring Distance and Area
Use the Measure tool
on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on the map
based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
The snap function snaps (attaches) the point of a measurement line to a point on a road or
another measurement object. This ensures a more accurate measurement of distance or
area. To measure area, you must completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point
to your starting point.
Notes
•
The Measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map. If you want to
measure the distance of a road, try creating a route. If you want to measure a large
area on the map, use the area object tools in the Draw tab.
•
To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while using
the Measure tool.
•
Measure objects (lines and areas) are saved with the current map project. When you
create a new map project, the measure objects do not display. If you want the same
measure objects on your new project, you must recreate them.
•
To view information about a measurement line, right-click it and click Info. The
measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab.
To Measure Distance or Area
Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map.
1. Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box. For more information, see Setting Units of Measure Preferences.
2. On the toolbar, click the Measure tool
14
. The pointer changes to
.
Getting Started
3. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box displays
next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or measurement
area to which you can snap, a yellow circle defines the snap point. Click to snap the
point of the measure line to the road or measurement object's point coordinate.
4. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement line.
OR
Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure tool on
the toolbar.
The measure line is a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line is
displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line.
5. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle
displays, and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The closure area is
transparently shaded, and the area and perimeter measurements display.
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats
These are the supported search formats. Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth, Maine.
Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop-down text boxes
along with a history of your most current search criteria.
Coordinate
QuickSearch
Advanced Search
N 43 48 30, W70 9 52
N 43 48 30
W70 9 52
N 43 48.4910, W 070
N 43 48.4910
W 070 09.8440
N434829.4600
W0700950.6400
N43-48-30, W70-9-52
N43-48-30
W70-9-52
N 43:48:29.46, W
N 43:48:29.46
W 70:9:50.64
4348
-7009
Format
Latitude/Longitude
09.8440
N434829.4600,
W0700950.6400
70:9:50.64
4348, -7009
15
Topo USA User Guide
4348N, 7009W
4348N
7009W
N4348, W7009
N4348
W7009
4348n, 7009w
4348n
7009w
n4348, w7009
n4348
w7009
4348 N, 7009 W
4348 N
7009 W
N 4348, W 7009
N 4348
W 7009
4348 n, 7009 w
4348 n
7009 w
n 4348 w 7009
n 4348
w 7009
434829, -700950
434829
-700950
4348.491, -7009.844
4348.491
-7009.844
4348.491, -7009.844
4348.491
-7009.844
434829.46, -700950.64
434829.46
-700950.64
43.80818333, -
43.80818333
-70.16406667
43 48.4910 N
70 09 50.64 W
43 48.4910 n
70 09 50.64 w
N 43 48.4910
70 09 50.64 W
434829.46 N, 700950.64 W
434829.46 N
700950.64 W
43, -70
43
-70
19TDJ 06354 51187
Same as QuickSearch
70.16406667
43 48.4910 N, 70 09 50.64
W
43 48.4910 n, 70 09 50.64
w
N 43 48.4910, W 70 09
50.64
MGRS/USNG
19TDJ0635451187
(NAD27)*
19TDJ06355109
19TDJ064511
16
Getting Started
19TDJ0651
UTM/UPS
19T 0406311E 4850964N
Zone 19T
Easting 0406311E
Northing 4850964N
19T 0406311 4850964
Zone 19T
Easting 0406311
Northing 4850964
19T / 0406311 / 4850964
Zone 19T
Easting 0406311
Northing 4850964
SPCS
ME-W 0500490 0355150
Zone ME-W
Easting 0500490
Northing 0355150
* Use this example for USNG with non-standard datum.
Searching Tips
When you use the Quick Search subtab on the Find tab or the Route tab to search for a
location, you must enter the information in a specific format.
Tips
•
Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below.
•
Do not use periods.
•
Search with the minimum amount of information to increase the number of results.
For example, if you search for Kalalau Trail in Hawaii but you are not sure of the
spelling, type "Kal, HI" and then scroll through the results until you find a match.
This table shows formats for search types.
For this type of search...
Address
Use this format...
Street address, City, State
Street address, ZIP Code
Example
100 Baxter Blvd,
Portland, ME
100 Congress St, 04101
17
Topo USA User Guide
Street address, City, State, ZIP
100 Congress St,
Code
Portland, ME 04101
City
City, State
Atlanta, Georgia
ZIP/Postal Code
Within the U.S.: ##### (5-digit
ZIP Codes only)
04096
Within Canada: ### (6-digit
J8E756
Postal Codes only)
Minor Point of Interest
POI name, City, State
Subway, Columbus, OH
Major Point of Interest or
POI/landmark name
Mount Rushmore
POI/landmark name, State
Space Needle, WA
Landmark
Latitude/Longitude
See Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats
For more information about the Find tab, see the Help topics under Finding a Location on
the Map.
Exiting the Program
To exit the program, click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The Save Changes dialog box opens if you made changes to a project.
•
Click Yes to save changes.
Note If only one change was made, the program closes after you save the project.
•
Click No to discard changes and close the program.
•
Click Cancel to return to DeLorme Topo North America.
No changes are saved.
If you made more than one change to the project or changes to more than one project,
once you save your project, the Exit dialog box opens.
•
Click Save and Exit to save changes to the selected files and close the program.
Note Clear the check box for any file you do not want to save.
•
Click No to discard changes and close the program.
•
Click Cancel to return to DeLorme Topo North America.
No changes are saved.
18
Getting Started
About the Interface
Tab Area
You can access most of the application's functions from the tab area at the bottom of the
screen. To access Help for a specific tab, click the Help button
on the tab. You can also
reorder the tabs, show or hide individual tabs or show or hide the tab panel.
•
Map Files
•
Find
•
Draw
•
Route
•
NetLink
•
Handheld Export
•
Info
•
Profile
•
3-D
•
Print
•
Voice
•
GPS
Control Panel
The Control Panel, located to the right of the map view, displays information pertinent to
the current map view and map cursor position. It also includes zoom and map pan buttons.
You can customize your interface to show or hide the Control Panel.
19
Topo USA User Guide
Data Zoom Level—The current data zoom level of the map view; ranges
between 1-0 (maximum zoom out) and 17-0 (maximum zoom in).
Zoom Tools—Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels, out one level, or
in one level. For more information, see Zooming In and Out.
Compass Rose—A group of nine buttons on a globe. The outer buttons
have yellow arrows; click one of the arrow buttons to pan the map in that
direction. Click the middle button to center the map on the previous map
view. This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom (up
to 256 times).
Map Rotation Tool—The arrow in the graphic indicates True North in
relation to the rotated map. Use the Map Rotation Tool to rotate the map
in any direction. You can rotate the map by clicking or dragging the square
map graphic in the direction you want or by selecting/typing the degree of
map rotation from the drop-down list.
Map Coordinates—Coordinates for the current map cursor position
display based on the units of measurement preferences chosen in the
Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Elevation and Interval—Display in the measurement chosen in the
Display tab of the Options dialog box. The data zoom level affects interval
display.
Scale Bar—Indicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in the
measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Overview Map
The overview map is a small map in the lower-right corner of the screen that offers a wideangle view of your current map view area. It is approximately three data zoom-levels out
from the current map view.
Tips
•
Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map center.
This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than you can within
the larger, current map view.
20
Getting Started
•
Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map. Point anywhere
on the view box. When the pointer becomes a
, drag the view box to the new
location.
Toolbar
•
You can show or hide toolbar options.
•
You can change the order of the toolbar options.
Default Toolbar
This is the default toolbar—click an area on the toolbar image for more information. You can
also view these topics in the Using the Toolbar section of the Help.
Additional Toolbar Options
These button groups are hidden in the default toolbar. To show a button group, right-click
the toolbar and click the check box next to the name of the group.
Print
GPS/Nav Mode
Map Panning
Using the Help System
Help Overview
21
Topo USA User Guide
There are several ways to get more information about the program's features and
functionality.
Tips and Info
There are three ways help is provided within the program.
•
Pop-up Tutorials
When you perform some actions in the program, a pop-up Did you know . . .?
tutorial opens. These provide additional information for using that particular function.
If you do not want to see that specific pop-up tutorial again, select the Do Not
Show Again check box before you close it.
If you do not want to see any pop-up tutorials, click the Help button on the toolbar
and then click Shut Off All Pop-Up Tutorials.
•
ToolTips
When you point to a tool for a few seconds, a short label (ToolTip) describing the tool
displays on your screen. ToolTips also display in windows and dialog boxes when you
point to a button, icon, or other feature.
•
Information Boxes
Several tabs contain information boxes. Information boxes provide descriptions
about the features and functions of the selected tab.
Help System
Click the Help button
on the toolbar to view the Help menu, and then click an item to
select it.
Tip To access a Help menu item using its underlined letter, click the Help button and then
press the underlined letter for the item on your keyboard. For example, to access the Map
Legend, click the Help button and then press the M key on your keyboard.
Tab Help
To get specific help for the tab you are using, click the Tab Help button
to open a
related Help topic. The button is available in the main tab area and in the Options dialog
box. In addition, many dialog boxes have a Help button that will open a help topic for a
particular task.
Glossary
22
Getting Started
See the Glossary Terms topic.
Using the Help System
To open Help, click the Help button
on the toolbar and then click Help Topics, or
press the F1 key on your keyboard. To open a task-related Help topic for the tab you are
working with, click the Help button
•
on the tab.
The Help system has four tabs.

Contents
To view an outline of the Help system contents, click the Contents tab.
•
To view the additional topics under a particular book, double-click the
book.
•

To view a topic, click the page.
Index
Use the following steps to search the Help system index.
o
1. While in the Help system, click the Index tab.
2. Type a keyword in the entry field. The list automatically scrolls to the
closest matching entry.
3. Double-click the topic.
OR
Click the topic and then click Display.
OR
Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Note
o
•
If you don't find what you're looking for in the index, click the Search
tab and try a search for your keyword.
o
Search
Use the following steps to search for particular words or phrases within topics
in the Help system.
o
1. While in the Help system, click the Search tab.
23
Topo USA User Guide
2. Type a keyword in the entry field and then click List Topics or press
the ENTER key on your keyboard. A list of topics containing the
keyword displays.
3. Double-click the topic under Select Topic to Display.
OR
Click the topic and then click Display.
OR
Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
o
Favorites
Use the Favorites tab to save topics for quick reference.
From the Help system, click the Favorites tab and then:
o
•
To save a topic that you are viewing, click Add.
•
To display a saved topic, double-click it in the list.
OR
Click it in the list of topics and then click Display.
•
To remove a topic from Favorites, click it in the list and then click
Remove.
•
You can move, resize, and minimize the Help window.
Printing Help Topics
To print any of the Help topics, select a topic (page with question mark) or heading (book
symbol) and then click Print. You can print the selected topic or a heading and all
subtopics.
OR
Right-click the topic displaying in the right window to print only that topic.
Tips
•
Before you click Print, expand any links in the topic that include information you
want to print within your topic.
24
Getting Started
•
To print all the Help topics, click the top level book in table of contents and then click
Print.
Web Help
A web version of the Help system is available on the DeLorme Technical Support website.
On the support site, select your product from the Browse by Category drop-down list, and
click the link for Help topics.
Help Documentation Conventions
The table below explains the formatting styles used in the Help documentation, including
links that expand, jump to another location within the same topic, or open a new topic.
The table below defines each convention and its use.
The convention...
Is used for...
ALL CAPITALS
Acronyms, names of certain commands, and keys on the
keyboard.
Note Use of the plus sign (+) between key names indicates key
combinations that perform various actions. For example, in the
directions "Press CTRL+SHIFT+F3 on your keyboard," you must
press and hold the CTRL and SHIFT keys while pressing F3.
Bold
Command buttons, tab names, and options when used in
procedures and exercise steps. Also used for information that
25
Topo USA User Guide
you type exactly into a particular field.
Headings and table headings are bold for emphasis.
Italic
Directory names and paths. Also used when referring to titles of
chapters, sections, and publications.
Blue underlined text
Hyperlinks. These links act differently depending on their
context. When it is:
•
Referenced with "for more information," the link goes to
another topic.
•
Embedded in text, such as in the example "Open the file,"
the link goes to another topic, opens drop-down text that
expands within the same topic, or displays a secondary
window with a definition or graphic.
Red underlined text
Opens expanding text that provides explanatory information. The
expanding text is italicized blue text.
Note
Additional information.
Notes
Tip
Helpful hints.
Tips
Glossary Terms
ADT
Alaska Daylight Time
Almanac
Data downloaded from satellites that contains the identity codes, location, and time
information for each satellite.
Arctic Circle
Parallel, or line of latitude around the Earth, at approximately 66°30' N. Because of the
Earth's inclination of about 23 1/2° to the vertical, it marks the southern limit of the area
26
Getting Started
within which, for one day or more each year, the Sun does not set (about June 21) or rise
(about December 21).
AST
Alaska Standard Time
Average Grade
Average of the grade from the start to the current cursor position (or finish).
Azimuth
The direction of travel or the direction between two points in reference to true or magnetic
north. When expressed in degrees, its value ranges from 0 to 360. A compass heading is an
azimuth. In most places, the word bearing has grown to mean the same thing as azimuth.
However, azimuth is always measured from true or magnetic north in a clockwise direction.
For example, due east is 90 and due west is 270. See also, Bearing.
Bearing
Like an azimuth, a bearing is measured in reference to true or magnetic north, but its value
never goes over 90. A bearing is always measured from the cardinal directions of north or
south. A typical bearing would be N45 E, which is the same as an azimuth of 45. The
bearing S45 W is an azimuth of 225. The use of the word bearing has changed over the
years and now means the same as azimuth. When tracking, bearing displays the direction of
travel between your current position and your next waypoint, relative to true or magnetic
North.
Bread crumb trail
A set of dots that display on your computer screen to record your progress as you travel.
CDT
Central Daylight Time
Climbing Distance
27
Topo USA User Guide
The total distance where the terrain is uphill.
Climbing Elevation
The amount of ascending vertical distance.
Coordinates
A set of numbers (e.g., latitude and longitude) used to identify the specific location of a
point.
Course
The azimuth and length of a line, considered together.
CST
Central Standard Time
Current Elevation
The elevation above sea level at a specific point.
Descending Distance
The total distance where the terrain is downhill.
Descending Elevation
The amount of descending vertical distance.
Differential GPS (DGPS)
A technique to improve GPS accuracy that uses pseudo-range errors recorded at a known
location to improve the measurements made by other GPS receivers within the same
general geographic area.
Dilution of Precision (DOP)
The total effect of all error sources in locating a position.
28
Getting Started
Download
To transfer information from a remote unit, such as a GPS receiver, to a computer.
EDT
Eastern Daylight Time
Easting
The measure of a position relative to the x-axis (horizontal) of a grid system.
Elevation Gain
The difference in elevation from the start of the profile to the end of the profile.
Ephemeris
Data that indicates the position and status of satellites.
EST
Eastern Standard Time
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time; used as the standard of time throughout the world.
GPS
Global Positioning System; a "constellation" of orbiting satellites used to calculate a precise
position on or near the earth's surface.
Grade
Actually percent grade, rise over run (100 x (rise/run)). For example, 6 means that for
every 100 ft, you gain 6 ft in elevation.
HDOP
29
Topo USA User Guide
Horizontal Dilution of Position; the measure of how much the geometry of the satellites
affects the horizontal position estimate.
Heading
Azimuth of the longitudinal axis of an aircraft or ship. Heading may differ from direction of
travel when flying or boating due to currents in the air or water.
Initialize
To set to a starting position, as in obtaining initial coordinates for a GPS receiver.
Latitude
The measure of a position on the earth's surface north or south of the equator in degrees,
minutes, and seconds. Defined as the angle from the equator's horizontal plane
perpendicular to the polar axis. All lines of latitude are parallel and are often referred to as
parallels.
Log
A record of the speed, direction, and route of travel as obtained via GPS.
Logging
Recording the speed, direction, and route traveled using GPS.
Longitude
The measure of a position on the surface of the earth east or west of the Prime Meridian in
degrees, minutes, and seconds. Defined as the angle from the vertical plane running
through the polar axis and the prime meridian. All lines of longitude meet at the poles and
are often referred to as meridians.
Maximum Elevation
The elevation of the highest point on a profile.
Maximum Speed field
30
Getting Started
When GPS tracking, displays your maximum speed.
MDT
Mountain daylight time
Minimum Elevation
The elevation of the lowest point on a profile.
MST
Mountain standard time
NMEA
National Marine Electronics Association
Northing
The measure of a position relative to the y-axis (vertical) of a grid system.
PDOP
The measure of how much the error in the position estimate produced from satellite range
measurements is amplified by a poor arrangement of satellites (with respect to the receiver
antenna).
Port
A hardware interface used by a computer to communicate with an external device.
PPS
Precise Positioning System; radio signals available to military and other authorized
personnel for GPS.
Real time
The actual time during which something takes place.
31
Topo USA User Guide
Receiver
Hardware device that receives data, such as from satellites.
Snapping
Attaching a point on one draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw
object. You can snap the central shape point of an arc to another object or snap a routable
road to an existing road, enabling routing from the drawn road to the road system on the
map database.
Speed field
When GPS tracking, displays your speed as you travel.
Terrain Distance
The 3-D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise and descent.
Third-party GPS device
A GPS receiver manufactured by a company other than DeLorme, such as GARMIN,
Magellan, Brunton, Lowrance, Trimble, and so forth.
Time field
When connected to a DeLorme GPS receiver, displays the Greenwich mean time.
Track
To observe or plot the moving path of an object.
Upload
To transfer information from a computer to a remote unit, such as a GPS receiver.
VDOP
32
Getting Started
The measure of how much the geometry of the satellites affects the vertical position
estimate.
Waypoints
Marked positions with specific coordinates that can be downloaded or uploaded.
Zone
A named grid system of any of the UTM/UPS, MGRS, or State Plane coordinate systems and
used as a basis for coordinate display. For example, UTM zone 19 specifies the six-degree
swath between longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S to 80N. Another example is
zone ME-W in the State Plane coordinate system, which specifies an area that covers the
western half of Maine. When using one these coordinate systems, the current zone and
coordinates east and north (the eastings and northings) of the zone origin are displayed.
Recreational Contacts
Tip
You can find most trails using QuickSearch on the Find tab. If a search is not successful, you
can use the Advanced search option on the Find tab to search for trails:
•
If you know the name of the trail you want to search for, select Name and/or
Category from the Find drop-down list and then select a Within option (U.S. State
is helpful when you do not know the city/town the trail is located in). Type the name
of the trail in the Name text box, type trail in the Keywords text box, type the
location information (if applicable), and then click Search.
•
If you do not know the name of the trail, select Category from the Find drop-down
list and then select the Within option. Type trail in the Keywords text box, type
the location information (if applicable), and then click Search.
Click a link to jump to that place in the table.
•
National Recreation Information
•
National Historic Trail Information
•
National Scenic Trails
•
Trails of Interest
33
Topo USA User Guide
National Recreation Information
Contact
Web Site Information
Name
Recreation.gov
Phone
Number
www.recreation.gov
877-4446777
National
www.fs.fed.us/
Forest Service
NFS Locator
800-8321355
www.fs.fed.us/recreation/map/state_list.shtml
202-2051706
National Park
www.nps.gov
Service
NPS Center
for
Recreation &
Conservation:
202-3546900
NPS Locator
www.nps.gov/findapark/index.htm
N/A
National
www.blm.gov/wo/st/en/prog/blm_special_areas/NLCS/monuments.html
BLM National
Monuments
Landscape
Conservation
System:
202-2083516
National
www.nps.gov/nr/
NPS Center
Historic
for
Sites—NPS
Recreation &
Conservation:
202-3546900
U.S. Fish and
Wildlife
Service
34
www.fws.gov
800-344WILD
Getting Started
National
www.blm.gov/wo/st/en/prog/blm_special_areas/NLCS/Trails.html
BLM National
Trails—BLM
Landscape
Conservation
System:
202-2083516
National
www.nps.gov
202-208-
Trails—NPS
3100 or NPS
Center for
Recreation &
Conservation:
202-3546900
National
www.gocampingamerica.com
800-395-
Association of
www.arvc.org
2267
RV Parks &
Campgrounds
(ARVC)
National Historic Trail Information
Trail Name
State(s)
Web Site Information
Phone
Number
California
CA, ID,
www.octa-trails.org/
816-252-
National
KS, MO,
www.nps.gov/cali/
2276
Historic Trail
NE, NV,
www.caminorealcarta.org/
575-528-
OR, UT,
WY
Info
Center:
MO
El Camino
NM, TX,
Real de Tierra
Mexico
8267
35
Topo USA User Guide
Adentro
Info
National
Center:
Historic Trail
NM
Iditarod
AK
National
www.nps.gov/elca/
www.iditarodnationalhistorictrail.org/
N/A
www.blm.gov/ak/st/en/prog/nlcs/iditarod.html
Historic Trail
Juan Bautista
AZ, CA,
www.therapure.com/anza-trail/anzamen.htm
De Anza
Mexico
www.nps.gov/juba/
National
Info
Historic Trail
Center:
N/A
CA
Lewis and
IA, IL,
www.lewisandclark.org/
800-701-
Clark National
ID, KS,
www.nps.gov/lecl/
3434
Historic Trail*
MO, MT,
N/A
ND, NE,
OR, SD,
WA
Info
Center:
MT
Mormon
IA,
www.mormontrails.org/
Pioneer
IL,NE,
www.nps.gov/mopi/
National
UT, WY
Historic Trail*
Nez Perce
ID, OR,
www.nezpercetrail.net/
208-940-
National
MT, WY
www.fs.fed.us/npnht/
0053
Historic Trail
Info
Center:
ID
Old Spanish
AZ, CA,
www.oldspanishtrail.org/
505-425-
National
CO, NM,
www.nps.gov/olsp/
6039
Historic Trail
NV, UT
36
Getting Started
Oregon
CA, ID,
www.octa-trails.org/
888-811-
National
KS, MO,
www.nps.gov/oreg/
6282
Historic Trail
NE, NV,
N/A
OR, UT,
WY
Info
Center:
MO
Overmountain
NC, SC,
www.ovta.org/
Victory
TN, VA
www.nps.gov/ovvi/
National
Info
Historic Trail
Center:
SC
Pony Express
CA, CO,
www.xphomestation.com/
National
KS, MO,
www.nps.gov/poex/
Historic Trail*
NE, NV,
N/A
UT, WY
Santa Fe
CO, KS,
www.santafetrail.org/
620-285-
National
MO, NM,
www.nps.gov/safe/
2054
Historic Trail
OK
www.nps.gov/semo/
334-877-
Info
Center:
NM
Selma To
AL
Montgomery
1984/334-
National
872-0509
Historic Trail
Trail of Tears
AL, AR,
www.nationaltota.org/
501-666-
National
GA, IL,
www.nps.gov/trte/
9032
Historic Trail*
KY, MO,
MS, NC,
OK, TN
37
Topo USA User Guide
Info
Center:
AR
* A trail that is a point in the data, but cannot be searched for using the Find
functionality.
National Scenic Trails
Trail Name
State(s)
Web Site Information
Phone Number
Appalachian
CT, GA, MA, MD,
www.nps.gov/appa/index.htm
304-535-6278
National Scenic
ME, NC, NH, NJ,
Trail
NY, PA, TN, VA,
www.appalachiantrail.org
Appalachian
www.nps.gov/appa/
Trail
VT, WV
Info Center: WV
Appalachian
WV
Trail
Conservancy
Conservancy:
304-535-6331
Continental
CO, ID,MT,
www.fs.fed.us/cdt
888-909-CDTA
Divide National
NM,WY
Scenic Trail
Info Center: CO
Florida National
FL
www.floridatrail.org/
877-HIKE-FLA
WI
www.iceagetrail.org/
800-227-0046
Scenic Trail
Ice Age National
Scenic Trail
www.nps.gov/iatr/
Natchez Trace
AL, MS, TN
National Scenic
Info Center: MS
www.nps.gov/natt/
N/A
866-445-3628
Trail
North Country
MI, MN, ND, NY,
www.northcountrytrail.org/
National Scenic
OH, PA, WI
www.nps.gov/noco/
Trail
Info Center: MI
38
Getting Started
Pacific Crest
CA, OR, WA
www.pcta.org/
National Scenic
Info Center: CA
www.fs.fed.us/pct/
Potomac
DC, MD, PA, VA,
www.potomactrail.org/
Heritage
WV
www.nps.gov/pohe/
National Scenic
Info Center: WV
919-285-1846
Trail
571-436-7801
Trail
Trails of Interest
Trail Name
State(s)
Web Site Information
Phone
Numbe
Abol Trail
ME
www.mainerec.com/baxter1.asp?Category=101&PageNum=101
N/A
Achenbach
ND
www.nps.gov/thro/planyourvisit/hiking-and-trail-information.htm
N/A
NC, TN
www.nps.gov/grsm/
865-
Trail
Balsam
Mountain
436-
Trail
1200
Black Creek
MS
www.fs.fed.us/r8/mississippi/
601-
Trail
9651600
Black
MA
Heritage
www.nps.gov/boaf/planyourvisit/things2do.htm
617-
www.afroammuseum.org/trail.htm
742-
Trail
Chattanooga
5415
SC
www.sctrails.net/trails/ALLTRAILS/Hiking/Upcountry/Chattooga.html
Trail
8037340173
Chilkoot
AK,
Trail
Canada
www.nps.gov/klgo/planyourvisit/chilkoottrail.htm
9079832921
Freedom
MA
www.thefreedomtrail.org/
617-
39
Topo USA User Guide
Trail
3578300
Glacier
CO
www.nps.gov/romo/planyourvisit/list_hiking_trails.htm
Gorge Trail
9705861206
John Muir
CA
www.pcta.org/about_trail/muir/over.asp
Trail
9162851846
Kalalau Trail
HI
www.hawaiistateparks.org/hiking/kauai/Index.cfm?hike_id=13
8085870300
Kekekabic
MN
www.kek.org/index2.html
Trail
800818HIKE
King Ravine
NH
www.fs.fed.us/r9/forests/white_mountain/recreation/hiking/
Trail
6035366100
Long Path
NJ, NY
www.nynjtc.org/panel/gohiking
2015129348
Long Trail
VT
www.greenmountainclub.org/page.php?id=2
8022447037
Ouachita
AR, OK
www.friendsot.org/
N/A
TX
www.nps.gov/bibe/planyourvisit/oml-itinerary.htm
N/A
National
Recreation
Trail
Outer
Mountain
Loop Trail
40
Getting Started
Ozark
MO
Highlands
www.arkansas.com/outdoors/hiking/trail-
479-
detail.aspx?type=B&trail=Ozark Highlands Trail
968-
National
2354
Recreation
Trail
Pinhoti Trail
AL
www.alabamatrail.org/hikingAL/Pinhoti/PinhotiI.htm
N/A
Ruby Crest
NV
www.fs.fed.us/r4/htnf/
775-
National
331-
Recreation
6444
Trail
Sheltowee
KY
Trace
www.sheltoweetrace.com/
859-
www.fs.fed.us/r8/boone/recreation/sheltowee.shtml
745-
National
3100
Recreation
Trail
Shining Sea
MA
www.capecodbikeguide.com/shiningsea.asp
N/A
UT
www.utah.com/bike/trails/slickrock.htm
800-
Bike Trail
Slickrock
Bike Trail
6356622
Snack Den
NC, TN
www.nps.gov/grsm/
865-
Ridge
4361200
Teton Crest
WY
www.nps.gov/grte/
N/A
OR
www.fs.fed.us/r6/mthood/
503-
Trail
Timberline
Trail
6681700
Tonto Trail
AZ
www.nps.gov/grca/planyourvisit/campsite-information.htm
928638-
41
Topo USA User Guide
7888
Wild Azalea
LA
www.fs.fed.us/r8/kisatchie/
Trail
3184737160
Wonderland
Trail
WA
www.nps.gov/mora/planyourvisit/the-wonderland-trail.htm
3605692211
42
Map Legend
The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which map colors
you chose on the Display tab of the Options dialog box. The tables below show the
symbolization of each feature, by map color.
Notes
•
Not all features are available at all zoom levels.
•
Not all features are available in all datasets.
•
High-contrast Color features display the same as Street Color features (except for land,
which displays as black).
Routable Trail Features
Topo
Street
Colors
Colors
Description
Major Trail (National Scenic, National Historic, etc.)
4-wheel Drive Trail
Trail/Walkway/Foot Trail
Important Some trails may cross private property. Contact the applicable trail department
to ensure you have the appropriate permissions before following a major trail. For contact
information, see Recreational Contacts.
Routable Road Features
Ferry Passenger
Ferry Vehicle
Interstate Highway (can also include this symbol:
)
Limited Access Road
Local Road
Major Connector, Forest Road
Minor Connector
Non Limited Access Interstate
43
Topo USA User Guide
Primary State Route
State Route (can also include this symbol:
)
Toll Road
U.S./National Route (can also include this symbol:
)
Unclassified Road
Unimproved Road
Land Cover
Topo
Street
Colors
Colors
n/a
Description
Bare Rock or Sand
Bureau of Land Management Land
Bureau of Mine Reclamation Land
n/a
Forest, evergreen
n/a
Forest, mixed
Ice or Snowfield
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 11)
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
Intermittent Water
Land
Military Area (at data zoom level 11)
Military Area (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
n/a
Mine or Quarry
Parks
River/Stream
n/a
44
Transitional Area, Lava, Salt Flats, or Mixed Barren
Map Legend
Water
n/a
Wetlands
Point Features
Topo
Street
Colors
Colors
Description
Amusements
Airport (private)
Airport (commercial public)
Airport (general aviation public)
Business (Amusement, Recreation, Specialty or Dept.
Store)
Camping (at data zoom level 14)
Camping (at data zoom level 11 thru 13)
Cemetery
Educational Facility
Exit, with services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, without services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, food (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, gas (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, lodging (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, other (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Family Outings
Fast Food
Gas
Hospital
45
Topo USA User Guide
Lodging
Metropolitan City
Military Base
National Capital (data zoom level 7 thru 10)
National Capital (data zoom levels 2 thru 6)
Outdoor Adventures
Point of Interest
Population Center
Public Service
Religious (buildings)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru
11)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Restaurants (general)
Restaurants (specialty)
Small City
State Capital
Unique Natural Feature (at data zoom level 8)
Line Features
Topo
Street
Colors
Colors
Description
County Boundary
Dam
46
Map Legend
Game Management District
International Boundary
Park Boundary
Pipeline
Power Line
Railroad (Abandoned)
Railroad
Runway
State Boundary
DeLorme Atlas and Gazetteer Symbols
Symbol
Description
Developed Boat Ramp (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Developed Boat Ramp (at data zoom level 13)
Freshwater Fishing (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Freshwater Fishing (at data zoom level 13)
Hunting (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Hunting (at data zoom level 13)
Saltwater Fishing (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Saltwater Fishing (at data zoom level 13)
Undeveloped Boat Ramp (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Undeveloped Boat Ramp (at data zoom level 13)
47
Using the Toolbar
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options
You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most. You can also activate
toolbar options that are not turned on by default or hide or show the entire toolbar. Some
toolbar options are grouped—for these, you can show or hide the group of buttons.
To Modify the Toolbar
1. Right-click the toolbar.
Toolbar options with a selected check box next to them are displayed on the toolbar.
2. Click an item to activate or inactivate it in the toolbar.
Reordering the Toolbar Options
To reposition the toolbar groups horizontally or vertically, just drag the dotted vertical bar
that separates each group to the new location (left, right, up, or down).
To Create a New Project
To create a new project, click the New button
on the toolbar. If you made changes to
the open project, the Save Changes dialog box opens to ask you if you want to save your
changes.
For more information, see Creating and Deleting Projects.
To Open a Project
To open an existing project:
49
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Open button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Open button, and then click Open Project.
If you made changes to a project that is already open, the Save Changes dialog box
opens. Note Map Files have .tpx and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme
Docs\Projects.
The Open File dialog box opens.
2. Select the project you want to view and click Open.
For more options for opening files, see Opening an Existing Project.
To Save a Project
To save the project that is currently open:
1. Click the Save button
on the toolbar.
The Save File dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the location where you want to save the project.
If you want to rename the project, type a new name in the File Name text box.
3. Click Save.
To Open the Map Library
To open the Map Library subtab on the NetLink tab, click the Map Library
button.
To Share Maps
To share your current map view, a route map and directions, or a profile, click the
MapShare button
on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard.
MapShare lets you share maps—even 3-D maps, routes, and profiles.
For information on emailing maps, routes, and profiles with the MapShare Wizard, click the
Help button in the MapShare Wizard.
To Create a Route
To set route points using the toolbar:
1. Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box (next to
the green Start button).
OR
Click the green Start button
50
and then click the location on the map where you
Using the Toolbar
want to start your route.
OR
Select an address book entry, a previous location, or your current GPS position from
the Start drop-down list.
2. Type the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box (next to
the red Finish button).
OR
Click the red Finish button
and then click the location on the map where you
want to end your route.
OR
Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish dropdown list.
3. Optional. If you want to add a stop or via to your route, click the Stop button
the Via button
or
and then click the location on the map where you want to add or
insert the stop or via. Repeat this step for each stop or via you want to add to your
route.
Note If the Add option is selected in the Route tab, stops and vias are added in the
order they are added to the route. If the Insert option is selected in the Route tab,
stops and vias are added in the order they are approached in the route. For more
information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
4. Click the Calculate button
.
Notes
•
If you have only the left map window open, the route Start, Finish, and Stop
buttons on the toolbar and on the Route tab are grayed out. To activate the options,
use the map resize tool to expose the right map window.
•
To use the current GPS location in a route, you must connect your device to your
computer and click the GPS button
on the toolbar (hidden by default) or on the
GPS tab.
•
Once a route is calculated, you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view route
directions, edit a route, and more. Click the Directions subtab to view the route
directions, the Advanced subtab to display the advanced routing options, or click
Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
51
Topo USA User Guide
To Sync Files and Information with a Handheld GPS Device
Click the Sync button
on the toolbar (also on the GPS and Handheld Export tabs) to
open the Earthmate® GPS Sync dialog to sync maps, waypoints, geocaches, tracks, and
routes with an Earthmate PN-Series GPS device.
If you are using another device, click the arrow to open the sync menu and select Other
Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
For more information on syncing information, see the Help topics listed under Using
Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices or Using Third-Party GPS Devices.
To Measure Distance
Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter/area on the map. For
more information, see Measuring Distance and Area.
1. Click the Measure tool
on the toolbar.
2. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box displays
next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or measurement
area to which you can snap, a yellow circle
defines the snap point. Click to snap
the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object's point coordinate.
Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to disable snapping.
3. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement line. The
measure line displays as a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line
displays in a label at each endpoint of the line.
4. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle
displays and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The perimeter
measurements display.
To Get Information About a Location
Use the Information button
on the toolbar to click a point, symbol, feature,
measurement line, track, or area on the map to identify it and view detailed information
about it.
The Information button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Information.
52
Using the Toolbar
Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature.
1. Click the Information button.
2. Click the map feature you want information for, such as a road, town, measurement
line, waypoint, track, draw symbol, or point of interest.
The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories.
Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type, length/area,
ZIP/Postal Code, town name, county name, state/province, coordinates, and
Standard Industrial Classification categories.
3. Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the category
to view more detailed information.
OR
Right-click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the
information categories. Right-click in the information box again and click Collapse
All to minimize all of the information categories.
4. Optional. Repeat steps 1–3 to get information about another location.
5. Optional. Right-click in the information box and click Print to print your map feature
information.
Notes
•
You can also get information about a location using the right-click option. Just rightclick the location and click Info.
•
The status bar (located above the tab area) displays draw object type, draw file
information, point of interest name (if applicable), street name/address, highway, city,
state/province, and ZIP/Postal Code information for the map location that your cursor is
positioned on.
•
Some map features (such as campgrounds, national scenic/historic trail information
centers, and state parks) display with a blue outline at higher data zoom levels. The
blue outline indicates that the feature has a hyperlink to its website. To open the
hyperlink, right-click the feature and then click Open Hyperlink OR click the URL in the
Info tab.
To Create a Profile
To create a profile:
53
Topo USA User Guide
1. Center your 2-D map on the area with the linear object you want to profile.
OR
Center the route you want to profile on the map.
2. Click the Profile button
on the toolbar.
3. Move your pointer over the map. The pointer changes from
to
when it
passes over an object that you can profile.
4. Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile.
When the object is selected, it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the
Profile tab area.
Note Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph. The
intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the
terrain profile. These lines indicate the height and distance of the particular location.
A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map.
You can also right-click a linear object or route on the map and click Profile. For more
information about profiles, see the Help topics under Profiling Linear Objects.
To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location
To open the GeoTagger Wizard, where you can combine images and data with GPS
information on the map, click the GeoTagger button
on the toolbar.
The Geotagger button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Geotagger.
For more information, see Getting Started with GeoTagger.
To Choose Options
To open the Options dialog box, click the Options button
Options dialog box to set preferences for program options.
The Options dialog box has the following tabs:
54
•
GIS
•
GPS
•
Sync
•
Voice
•
Find (GPS Radar)
on the toolbar. Use the
Using the Toolbar
•
Map Features (Basic and Custom)
•
Display
•
Keyboard Shortcuts
•
3-D
An Options button that opens the Options dialog box is also available on the 3-D, Find >
GPS Radar, and GPS tabs.
To open the Options menu, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the
toolbar. The following menu options are available:
•
Options—Opens the Options dialog box.
•
Tab Manager—Opens the Tab Manager dialog box where you can show or hide
individual tabs and reorder tabs.
•
Netbook Mode—Allows you to turn the Netbook Mode on or off. If the mode is
turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Netbook Mode to turn it on or
off. For more information, see Using Small-screen Devices.
You can also customize your interface:
•
Show Tab Area Panel—Allows you to show or hide all the tabs. If Show All Tabs is
turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show Tab Area Panel to show
or hide the tab area.
•
Show Control Panel—Allows you to show or hide the Control Panel. If Show Control
Panel is turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show Control Panel to
show or hide it.
To Grab and Pan the Map
To drag and pan the 2-D or 3-D map in any direction, click the Map Panning button
on
the toolbar.
The Map Panning button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Map Panning.
Tip With your cursor anywhere on the map, press the CTRL key on your keyboard—the
cursor becomes a white hand. Hold down your left mouse button to drag the map to a new
location.
To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection
55
Topo USA User Guide
The GPS button on the toolbar lets you start your GPS connection if the device is not active
or stop the connection if it is active.
The GPS button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar and click
GPS/NavMode.
To start or stop your GPS connection, click the GPS button
•
on the toolbar.
If you are using NavMode, the GPS tab is minimized and the Control Panel is hidden,
but you can show them. For more information, see Customizing the Interface.
•
If you start a connection and you are not using NavMode, the GPS tab area opens so
you can monitor your GPS status.
Note NavMode is enabled by default. If you want to use the GPS tab for your default mode,
you can disable NavMode on the GPS tab in the Options dialog.
To Use GPS NavMode
NavMode offers a hands free, full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or 3-D.
The NavMode button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar and click
GPS/NavMode.
To Turn NavMode On/Off
Click the NavMode button
to turn it on or off. The button is grayed out
unless you
have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file. When the button appears
indented
, NavMode is on.
You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar and click the GPS tab.
OR
Click the Options button
on the GPS tab.
2. Clear the Use NavMode check box if you do not want to use NavMode when you
start your GPS. Select the check box if you do want to start GPS in NavMode.
3. Click OK.
To Print
56
Using the Toolbar
To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab, click the Print button
on the
toolbar.
The Print button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the menu
and click Print.
For more information, see Printing a Map.
To Print the Map Screen
To print the current view as it displays on the screen, click the Print Screen button
on
the toolbar.
The Print Screen button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Print Screen.
57
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Display Options Overview
The following topics explain how to use the Display options in the Options dialog box:
•
Displaying Basic Map Features
•
Customizing the Interface
•
Customizing the Map Features Preferences
•
Changing the Map Colors
•
Changing the Map Magnification Level
•
Changing the Contour Detail Preferences
•
Changing How POIs Display on the Map
•
Setting Units of Measure Preferences
Customizing the Interface
You can customize the interface for your application by hiding the tab panel area and the
Control Panel. If you optimized your installation for use with a netbook, you can turn
Netbook Mode on or off.
To Customize the Interface
1. Click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar.
2. To turn on an option when it is not selected, click it to select the check box.
OR
To turn off an option when it is selected, click it to clear the check box.
•
Use Tab Manager to show or hide individual tabs or reorder tabs.
•
Use Show Tab Area Panel to show or hide the entire tab area.
•
Use Show Control Panel to show or hide the Control Panel.
•
Use Netbook Mode to turn the optimized small-screen device view on or off.
For more information, see Using Small-screen Devices.
Notes
•
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to customize the interface.
•
Your settings are saved until you change them.
•
Click Options in the menu to open the Options dialog box.
59
Topo USA User Guide
Displaying Basic Map Features
You can show or hide basic map features on your map.
You can also customize map features and customize the interface.
Notes
•
If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes, verify the Use
Custom Map Features check box is not selected.
•
Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to the default preferences.
•
The map features available are based on the Map Colors option you are using.
To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences
Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences. Changes made to the
map view display almost immediately after selection.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the map.
OR
Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map.
•
Shaded Relief
Shaded relief becomes visible at data zoom level 6-0 or greater. It simulates
the effect of sun shining on terrain features and casting shadows, providing
greater depth perception of the image. Lighter shades of gray indicate gentle
terrain and darker shades indicate steep terrain. Using shaded relief may slow
down the draw time of the map screen as you pan.
•
Contours
Contour lines are available at data zoom level 6-0 or greater. Contour lines
show the elevation of the land in feet or meters. The closer the contour lines,
the greater the slope. The distance between the lines is the contour interval,
which is indicated in the Control Panel (distance units are controlled in the
Options dialog box).
•
60
Land Cover
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Land cover colors are available at all data zoom levels. Colors indicate
vegetation and land cover areas on the map such as rock and sand, forests,
transitional areas, and wetlands.
•
Grids
The Grids option can be used to identify coordinate points on the map. Grid
lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of your map.
•
Parks or Reserves
Parks and Reserves are available at data zoom level 7-0 or greater and
include areas such as parks, preserves, recreational area and public forests.
•
Publicly Managed Lands
Publicly Managed Lands are only available when the Bureau of Land
Management (BLM) dataset is downloaded and installed. The feature includes
areas such as lands managed through the Bureau of Land Management and
displays at all data zoom levels.
•
Game Management Districts
Wildlife Management Units are only available when the Wildlife Management
Units (WMU) dataset is downloaded and installed. The feature includes areas
of managed wildlife and game and displays at data zoom level 6-0 or greater.
•
USGS Quadrangle Coverage
The USGS 7.5 minute quadrangle coverage is indicated by red lines. These
display at data zoom level 8-0 or greater. Quadrangle names display at data
zoom level 9-0 and higher. To view quad info such as Orig Date and Quad
Order ID number (needed when purchasing quads), right-click a point within
the quad and then click Info. An information box displays in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
•
3DTQ Region Coverage
Displays the DeLorme 3DTQ product CD volume label, which covers each map
area at data zoom level 10-0 or greater.
•
Map Center Crosshair
The map center crosshair indicates the map center at any data zoom level.
•
Exits
View exits on primary limited access roads, interstates, and toll roads.
Available at data zoom level 10-0 or greater.
61
Topo USA User Guide
•
One Ways
One ways display as bright green triangles on roads, pointing toward the
direction of travel (most noticeable in large cities). They are available at data
zoom level 13-0 or greater.
•
Places (Minor)
View smaller towns, suburbs, locales, and natural features. Zoom levels vary.
•
Roads (Minor)
View secondary roads, local and rural routes, trails, and railroads. Zoom
levels vary.
•
Points of Interest
•
Major—View many different points of interest, including recreational
areas, public safety, rest areas, and more.
•
Minor—View general points of interest including educational,
technology, government, and religious buildings/locations.
•
Business (Major)—View many different travel-related points of
interest including hospitals, camping, restaurants, and more.
•
Business (Minor)—View general points of interest including small
shops and food stores, laundromats, and golfing.
•
ZIP-Postal Codes
ZIP/Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom level 8-0 and greater, with
ZIP/Postal Code labels displaying at data zoom level 10-0 and greater.
•
Town Borders
•
View town borders at data zoom level 10-0 and greater for the
following states:
Arkansas
Louisiana
Mississippi
North
Vermont
Connecticut
Maine
Missouri
Carolina
Virginia
Illinois
Maryland
Nebraska
North
Washington
Indiana
Massachusetts
New
Dakota
DC
Iowa
Michigan
Hampshire
Ohio
West
Kansas
Minnesota
New
Pennsylvania
Virginia
Jersey
Rhode
Wisconsin
Island
62
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
New York
South
Dakota
•
•
County Borders
View shaded outlines of U.S. counties at data zoom levels 7-0 or greater.
•
International Labels
View country labels at data zoom levels 1-0 through 4-0.
•
Urban Area Color
Displays a shaded map area in populated regions at data zoom levels 5-0.
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences
You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize your
map to meet your specific needs. You can even customize which POIs display.
To Set Custom Map Features
This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific, custom set of map features for
your map display from hundreds of options. Note that changes are not visible until you click
the Done button.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize
Features to display the custom options.
Note Custom map feature selections override selections in the basic features list.
4. To quickly search for a particular type of feature, type the name of the item in the
Search text box.
A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature types are listed in
63
Topo USA User Guide
the Search Results window. Results for the number of keywords and types found
also display.
A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map.
•
Select/clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that feature.
•
Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results window to
show none of the features listed.
•
Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window to
display all of the features listed.
•
Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results
window.
•
Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search
Results window.
5. To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map, click the plus
signs to expand the individual branches. A selected check box indicates the feature
type displays on the map.
Note Some branches expand further than others. Selecting/clearing a check box at
a certain branch of the tree shows/hides all the items below that level.
•
Select/clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that
feature.
•
Click All to select all map features in the program.
•
Click None to select none of the types in the program.
Note A small number of features cannot be turned off. They are part of the
base map display and cannot be changed. This is why certain levels on the
tree remain unavailable (appear dimmed or gray).
6. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
•
When you save the current project, the following feature preferences are saved in
reference to map features:
64
o
Major map features preferences
o
Individual custom feature preferences
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
o
When you create a new project, the current map settings are used. Click Use Defaults
to return to the default settings.
Changing the Map Colors
When you use a laptop computer while traveling, it can be difficult to see the map display
on your screen. This can be especially true at night or on a bright sunny day. Changing your
default map colors to high-contrast map colors can make your map display easier to see.
To Change the Map Colors
Use the following steps to change the map display.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. From the Map Colors drop-down list, select High-Contrast Colors to make the
map display darker for improved in-vehicle visibility, Street Colors to emphasize
streets and highways on the map, or Topo Colors to emphasize contours, parks and
public lands, land cover, and so on.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Showing Hybrid Maps
Raster data, such as aerial and satellite data, is image-based and does not provide typical
map information, such as street names, route numbers, and so on. The Hybrid Map feature
in the left map window lets you overlay this type of map information onto raster data.
Note You cannot create a route in the left map window. Once you create a route in the
right map window, the route line displays in the left map window.
To Show Roads and Text Labels on Imagery
Use the following steps to show roads, road names and numbers, names of bodies of water
and more on imagery in the left map window.
1. Ensure the left map window is displaying and your raster data, such as Satellite
Imagery (Sat 10) or Aerial Imagery (DOQQ),is displayed.
65
Topo USA User Guide
2. At the top of the left map window, select the raster dataset from the data drop-down
list.
3. Click the Hybrid Map button. All roads, contours, points, text labels, and so on
display identically to the data that is displayed in the right map window.
Note The Hybrid Map button is unavailable for vector dataset types.
Changing the Map Magnification Level
If you want to change the size of the map image, but not change the degree of geographic
detail on the map, use the magnification settings in the Options dialog box.
To Change the Map Magnification
Use the following steps to change the map magnification.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select a magnification percentage (50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 175%, or
200%) from the Magnification drop-down list.
Note Although the size of the image changes, the degree of geographic detail does
not.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Changing the Contour Details Preferences
Contour detail preferences affect how contours display on the map.
To Set the Contour Detail Preferences
Use the following steps to change the contour preferences.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
66
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
3. Under Appearance, select the contour detail from the Contours drop-down list.
•
Normal Detail—Uses the default values for displaying contours and labels.
•
High Detail—Approximately doubles the default values for displaying
contours and labels.
•
Low Detail—Approximately halves the default values for displaying contours
and labels.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Changing How POIs Display on the Map
You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map.
To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols
Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols are
displayed on the map.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop-down list.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
•
The appearance of a POI many change at different data zoom levels.
•
The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map
features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box. For more
information, see Displaying Basic Map Features.
This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POIs.
67
Topo USA User Guide
If you
You will see
You will see
You will see
You will see
You will see
view large
the following
the following
the following
the following
the following
symbols
information
information
information
information
information
at data
at data
at data
at data
at data
at data
zoom
zoom level
zoom level
zoom level
zoom level
zoom level
level...
13-0
14-0
15-0
16-0
17-0
14
names and
name of the
name of the
name of the
name of the
small square
POI and the
POI and the
POI and the
POI and the
symbols
large symbol
large symbol
large symbol
large symbol
small
name of the
name of the
name of the
name of the
squares only
POI and a
POI and the
POI and the
POI and the
small square
large symbol
large symbol
large symbol
small square
name of the
name of the
name of the
symbols
POI and a
POI and the
POI and the
only
small square
large symbol
large symbol
15
symbol
16
N/A
symbol
N/A
small square
name of the
name of the
name of the
symbols and
POI and a
POI and a
POI and the
some names
small square
small square
large symbol
of POIs
symbol
symbol
Setting Units of Measure Preferences
You can change the units of measure used to represent how coordinate formats, distance,
datum, and bearing listings display. Changing these preferences affects how units of
measure display in several areas of the program: such as on the map and in the Control
Panel.
As you change your unit of measure preferences, a description of each choice displays in the
information box (in the center of the Options dialog box) immediately after you select it.
To Change the Coordinate Preferences
Changing the coordinate preferences affects the:
•
68
Coordinates display on the Control Panel.
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
•
Coordinate MapNotes.
•
Grid label display, if Grids are selected in Map Features.
•
Any other place where coordinates display or print.
Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop-down list.
•
Degrees
•
Degrees, Minutes
•
Deg, Min, Sec
•
UTM/UPS (Universal Transverse Mercator/Universal Polar Stereographic)
•
MGRS (Military Grid Reference System)
•
USNG (United States National Grid)
•
SPCS (State Plane Coordinate System)
Note When you select SPCS, an additional drop-down box displays for Zone.
Select the zone from the list.
4. Select the datum from the Datum drop-down list.
•
WGS84 (World Geodetic System of 1984)
•
NAD27 (North American Datum of 1927), which also includes OOH (Old
Hawaiian) Datum when in Hawaii
•
NAD83 (North American Datum of 1983)
5. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Note The Datum displayed is automatically adjusted when your change your
coordinate preference.
Notes
69
Topo USA User Guide
•
UTM/UPS and MGRS coordinate systems are best used with NAD27 datum. 95% of
the USGS quads containing UTM grid lines uses the NAD27 datum, which is helpful if
you are comparing a map generated from your mapping application to a USGS map.
•
If the USNG coordinate system is not matched with NAD83 datum, a warning
message displays (unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again option).
•
If the UTM/UPS or MGRS coordinate system is mismatched to WGS84 datum, a
warning message displays (unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again
option).
•
The State Plane Coordinate System originally used NAD27 datum and was measured
in statute miles. Some states have updated their systems to WGS84 datum and/or
kilometers. If you are working with a site map, verify the datum, distance measures,
and zone used and match them in your application.
To Change the Distance Preferences
Distance preferences affect how distance and areas display throughout the program.
Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar and then click Options.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the measurement from the Measurements drop-down list.
•
Statute Miles (statute feet are used for small distances)
•
Kilometers (meters are used for small distances)
•
Nautical Miles/Feet (statute feet are used for small distances)
•
Nautical Miles/Meters (meters are used for small distances)
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
To Change the Bearing Preferences
Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab or
from an Advanced (Distance From) search in the Find tab. Bearing refers to the compass
direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees (for example, 30°) or nearest
compass point (for example, NNE) and indicated from True North or Magnetic North.
Notes
70
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
•
Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and Magnetic
North at a specific location.
•
The bearing setting does not affect map appearance.
Use the following steps to change the bearing.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar and then click Options.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the bearing from the Bearing drop-down list.
•
True North—The direction to the north pole. This is the default setting.
•
Magnetic North—The direction that a compass needle points.
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas
You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary (right) map, secondary (left) map, tab
area, and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools.
Notes
•
The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose another
tab.
•
Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on the
number of results.
•
You can also hide the tab area panel.
To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method
Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas.
1. Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows. The cursor
becomes a
.
OR
Point to the horizontal edge of the tab/main map window. The cursor becomes a
.
2. Drag to resize.
71
Topo USA User Guide
3. To cancel the resize while dragging, press the ESC key on your keyboard. The size
just prior to this resize is restored.
To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools
The map resize tool runs perpendicular to the tab area. If the secondary and primary maps
are both displaying, the resize tool is the bar that separates them. When the bar is moved
all the way to the left of the map, only the primary map displays. When the bar is moved all
the way to the right of the map, only the secondary map displays.
There are several methods you can use to resize the map area:
•
Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see.
•
Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see.
•
Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1/4 of the
screen width. You can repeat this step until the primary map is no longer visible.
•
Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1/4 of the
screen width. You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no longer visible.
•
Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map.
•
Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map.
•
Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal percentage
of both the secondary and primary maps.
To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools
There are two tab area resize tools. The horizontal resize tool is located above the tab area
and lets you adjust the height of the tab area. The vertical resize tool is located between the
tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the tab area.
Using the Horizontal Resize Tool
•
Drag the horizontal bar up/down to expose the tab area you want to see.
•
Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally increase the
tab height. You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush with the
bottom of the compass rose in the control panel.
•
Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally decrease the
tab height. You can repeat this step until only the tab names display.
72
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
•
Double-click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to its
maximum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode or higher).
Note If the tab area is below the default mode, double-click the bar to return the
tab height to its default percentage.
•
Double-click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height to its
minimum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode).
Note If the tab area is above the default mode, double-click the bar to return the
tab height to its default percentage.
•
Double-click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height to its
default view.
Using the Vertical Resize Tool
•
Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to see.
•
Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to see.
•
Click the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab
width. You can repeat this stop until the overview map is no longer exposed.
•
Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the
width of the overview map. You can repeat this step until the tab area is no longer
exposed.
•
Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area.
•
Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map.
•
Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and overview
maps to their default views.
Viewing Two Maps at the Same Time
The split-window lets you view two maps at the same time.
You can access the left map using the map resize tool that runs perpendicular to the tab
area. If the left and right maps are both displaying, the resize tool will be the bar that
separates them. When the bar is moved all the way to the left of the map, only the right
map will display. When the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map, only the left
map will display. For more information on using the map resize tool, see Resizing the Map
and Tab Areas.
Accessing Data Collections
73
Topo USA User Guide
When the left map window is activated, a bar displays on the top of the left map (see
graphic below). This bar displays two drop-down lists: one for swapping data and one for
changing the map from 2-D to 3-D and vice versa. You can also use the Hybrid Map option
to show roads on raster data and use zoom tools that work specifically with the left map
window. All of the compatible data collections that you saved to your hard disk drive are
available from the data drop-down list.
Note For more information about saving data to your hard disk drive, see Saving Data to
Your Hard Drive.
Note The graphic above displays Color Aerial Imagery, available separately from DeLorme.
Additional Facts About Split-Window Functionality
The maps interact as follows:
•
If you are viewing both the right and left maps at different data zoom levels, a box
(or lines, depending on the current data zoom level) displays on the map that is
zoomed out the furthest. The box/lines indicate the area that is in view on the
opposite map.
•
If you are viewing the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are
not equally represented on the screen (50/50), a box (or lines) displays on the map
that is covering the larger amount of screen area. The box/lines indicate the area
that is in view on the opposite map.
•
Both windows are centered on the same coordinate position. Panning or rotating in
one map causes the same action on both maps.
•
The left map window has its own zoom level controls. You can change the zoom level
of the left map without affecting the zoom level in the right map window. However,
after you adjust the zoom level in the left map window, the zoom tools on the
Control Panel incrementally adjust the map. For example, if the left map is at zoom
level 6-0 and the right map at zoom level 8-0, and you click the Zoom Out 1 tool,
the left map displays at zoom level 5-0 and the right map at 7-0.
•
The overview map in the tab area is always associated with the right map window.
•
Other tab functionality may be affected by use of the split-screen function, as
follows:

Draw—The line and polygon draw tools work in either map window. The
Select tool
74
highlights the same draw object on both maps and you can
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
then manipulate both objects at the same time. Draw files are created for
both windows in the same project.

Route—You can create routes only in the right window; routes display in both
windows.

GPS—You can log with GPS in the right map window; log playback displays in
both windows.

3-D—The 3-D map always displays in the left map window.
Showing or Hiding Tabs
The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding
individual tabs. You can access Tab Manager:
•
During installation
•
After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu
•
From the Start menu
Notes
•
If you use Tab Manager while the program is open, you must exit and restart the
program to view the tab changes.
•
To show or hide the entire tab area panel, click the arrow next to the Options
button
on the toolbar. If the tab area is showing and you want to hide it,
click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it. If the tab area is
hidden and you want to show it, click Show Tab Area Panel to select the check
box.
To Show Individual Tabs
Use the following steps to show tabs using Tab Manager.
1. Open DeLorme Topo North America, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>Topo....>Tools, and then
click Tab Manager.
2. Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program.
Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order.
3. Click OK.
75
Topo USA User Guide
4. Exit DeLorme Topo North America.
5. Open DeLorme Topo North America.
To Hide Individual Tabs
Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of DeLorme Topo North America.
Use the following steps to hide tabs using Tab Manager.
1. Open DeLorme Topo North America, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>Topo....>Tools, and then
click Tab Manager.
2. Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program.
OR
Click Minimum. Only the required tabs will display in the program.
Note Find, Map Files, Info, and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be hidden.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit DeLorme Topo North America.
5. Open DeLorme Topo North America.
Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences
Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager
preferences with other DeLorme Topo North America users.
To Import Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to import another user's Tab Manager preferences.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button
on
the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs > DeLorme > Topo... > Tools and then
click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
76
Customizing the Map and Tab Display
3. Browse to the location of the configuration (preferences) file, select it, and then click
Open.
Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported configuration file.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.
5. Exit your application.
6. Open your application.
To Export Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration file.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button
on
the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs > DeLorme > Topo... > Tools, and then
click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Type a name for the configuration (preferences) file in the File Name text box and
then click Save. Configuration files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme
Docs\Configuration.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.
Reordering the Tabs
Use the Tab Manager feature to customize your program by reordering tabs. You can access
Tab Manager:
•
During installation
•
After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu
•
From your computer's Start menu
Note If you use Tab Manager to make changes while the program is open, you must exit
and restart the program to view the tab changes.
To Reorder the Tabs
Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager.
1. Open DeLorme Topo North America, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar and click Tab Manager. OR
77
Topo USA User Guide
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>Topo... >Tools, and then
click Tab Manager.
2. Click the tab you want to reorder to highlight it.
3. Click the up arrow
or the down arrow
to move the tab to the new position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder.
5. Optional. Click Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default tab
order (showing all available tabs).
6. Click OK.
7. Exit DeLorme Topo North America.
8. Open DeLorme Topo North America..
78
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Your application comes with the following DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes:
•
3-D Navigation
•
Desktop Mapping
•
In-vehicle Navigation
You cannot edit DeLorme schemes, but you can create custom schemes that you can edit.
You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need.
To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click Apply to activate the selected scheme.
Creating a New Custom Scheme
You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses.
To Create a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to create a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click New.
The Scheme drop-down list is completed with Custom Scheme# (where # indicates
the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you have created).
Note If you want to rename the new scheme file, click File, click Rename, and then
79
Topo USA User Guide
type a new name in the Scheme text box. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard
when finished. The new name displays.
4. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed.
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
There are three DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes that you cannot edit; however, you
can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options
dialog box.
To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to edit a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes.
4. Select the List option.
5. From the Commands drop-down list, select the command grouping to which you
want to assign shortcuts. If you want assign shortcuts to several groupings, select
All Commands.
6. Click to select the command to which you want to assign a shortcut.
7. Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box.
8. Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign for
that command.
9. Click Assign. The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you
assigned and displays as "pending."
10. Repeat the steps for each command you want to assign.
11. Click Apply to save the changes.
OR
Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog box.
80
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Notes
•
To sort the command list view, click a heading (Group, Command, or Shortcut).
•
You cannot change the following keyboard shortcut combinations:
o
o
o
ALT+F4 (Close Window)
o
F1 (Help)
o
ALT+F1 (Help Menu)
o
SHIFT+F10 (Context Menu)
o
CTRL+C (Copy)
o
CTRL+V (Paste)
o
CTRL+X (Cut)
o
CTRL+Y (Redo)
o
CTRL+Z (Undo)
o
ALT+M (Set Focus on Map)
You cannot use the following keys when assigning shortcuts:
o
Windows Key
o
Application Key
o
Print Screen
o
Scroll Lock
o
Sleep
o
Pause/Break
o
Enter
o
Caps Lock
o
Num Lock
o
Spacebar
o
Insert
o
Backspace
o
Multi-media Keys
You cannot assign a letter or number on its own. For example, you cannot assign a
keyboard shortcut with the number 3; you must use a modifier (such as CTRL or ALT)
with letters and numbers.
81
Topo USA User Guide
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme
You cannot edit DeLorme schemes; however, you can create a copy of a DeLorme scheme
that you can modify to fit your needs.
To Customize a DeLorme Scheme
Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Copy.
The active scheme changes to Copy of Desktop Mapping#, Copy of In-vehicle
Navigation#, Copy of 3-D Navigation#, etc. (depending on the DeLorme scheme you
chose to copy).
5. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme.
6. Optional. Rename the scheme.
Renaming a Custom Scheme
Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you choose. You cannot rename
DeLorme schemes.
To Rename a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Rename.
The Scheme text box becomes active.
82
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
5. Type the name in the Scheme text box.
6. Click Apply. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name.
Deleting a Custom Scheme
Once you have created a custom scheme, you can delete it at any time. You cannot delete
DeLorme schemes.
To Delete a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Delete.
5. Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme.
Importing a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.
To Import a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to import a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Scheme File dialog box opens.
83
Topo USA User Guide
4. Browse to the location where you saved the .keyscheme file, select it, and then click
Open.
The imported file is now your active scheme.
Exporting a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.
To Export a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to export a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Scheme File dialog box opens.
5. Type a name in the File Name text box, browse to the location where you want to
save the .keyscheme file, and then click Save.
Searching For Commands
The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets you
search for a specific command or command group.
Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to
sort by (Group, Command, or Shortcut).
To Search For a Command or Command Group
Use the following steps to search for a command or command group.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the Search option.
84
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
4. In the Commands text box, begin typing the name of the command or command
group you are searching for. As you type, the list box under the Commands text box
displays word matches.
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme
The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete list of all
of the scheme's shortcut keys.
To View a List of Shortcut Keys
Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the
Scheme drop-down list.
4. Optional. To sort the list view, click the heading you want to sort by (Group,
Command, or Shortcut).
5. Click Reference Card.
The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same column you
selected in step 3.
6. Optional. Print the list from your Web browser.
Print a reference card from your web browser
•
Use the Print Preview functionality in your web browser to see if the list will
display as you want it to. If you do not like the way the list looks in the preview
(for example, the list prints without grid lines in the table or does not print in
color), change the advanced print settings in your Web browser.
•
If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout, from the File
menu, select Page Setup. Remove the text and the header and footer text boxes
and then click OK.
•
Changes made to the browser's advanced print settings and page setup affect the
85
Topo USA User Guide
printing of all web pages.
86
Viewing Map Data
Saving Data to Your Hard Drive
To Save DeLorme Topo North America Data to Your Hard Drive
Use the following steps to save DeLorme Topo North America data to your hard drive.
1. Close all programs on your computer.
2. Use your computer’s Control Panel to locate the program and click Change. The
Program Maintenance screen opens.
OR
Insert the DeLorme Topo North America DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Browse to
the DVD drive on your computer and view the contents. Double-click setup.exe.
The Program Maintenance screen opens.
3. Ensure Modify is selected and click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation.
5. When prompted, click Finish.
Connecting Data
Only connected, compatible data displays in DeLorme Topo North America. You can improve
performance by saving the data to your hard drive.
To Connect Data
Use the following steps to connect a dataset.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click Add and then click Data Locations.
The Data Locations dialog box opens a list of the of the data sources on your system.
3. If the dataset you want to view displays in the list, ensure its check box is selected.
AND/OR
If the dataset you want to view does not display in the list, click Add, select the data
folder where the dataset is located from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and click
OK.
4. Click Done when finished.
Note To remove a data source from the Data Locations list, select the data source and click
Remove.
Viewing Data
87
Topo USA User Guide
You can view two types of data at the same time using the split-window function and by
connecting the data with the Data Locations option in the Map Files tab.
The only data types that you can view in the right map window are DeLorme Topo North
America data and 3-D TopoQuads data. To view 3-D TopoQuads data in the right map
window, you must disable your DeLorme Topo North America data connection and enable
only the 3-D TopoQuads data connection.
The dataset that displays in the left map window is dependent on the selection made in the
data drop-down list at the top of the left map window.
88
Using Projects and Map Files
Projects and Map Files Overview
You can save all of your work as a single project file so you can open it again later. You can
create various map views and save each in a different project.
What is a project?
A project consists of the map center coordinates, the current data zoom level, the current
magnification, rotation, preferences, and links to routes or draw layers you have added to it.
As you create routes and draw layers, they are added to the current project. Projects are
saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in C:\DeLorme Docs. For example, a
draw layer is saved in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw.
Can I reuse draw layers and routes in other projects?
After creating routes or adding your own roads, you may not want to do all of the work
again in another project. You can share routes and draw layers between projects using the
Add button on the Map Files tab.
Can I send routes or draw layers to another DeLorme user?
Projects, including their routes and draw layers, can be packaged into one transfer file for
convenience. The transfer file facilitates emailing, copying project information to other
computers, and copying projects between DeLorme programs.
You can use MapShare to share maps, routes, or profiles with non-DeLorme users. For more
information, see To Share Maps.
What is the Geocaching menu on the Map Files tab for?
The Geocaching menu allows you to manage Geocaching.com pocket queries from within
your mapping application. For more information, see Geocaching Overview.
Creating and Deleting Projects
You can create various map views and save each in a different project.
To Create a New Project
Use the following steps to create a new project.
89
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File and then click New.
OR
Click the New File button
3. Click the Save button
on the toolbar.
on the toolbar. Projects have .tpx extensions and are
saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
OR
Click File and then click Save As to give the project a name other than the default.
Note You can also use the toolbar to create and save map files.
To Delete a Project
Use the following steps to delete a project.
1. Open a project.
2. From the Map Files tab, click File, point to Current View, and click File Info.
3. Browse to the file location on your computer specified under Directory in the Map
Files tab area.
4. Select the file.
5. From your computer's File menu, select Delete.
6. Click Yes at the Delete File confirmation message.
Opening an Existing Project
You can create various map views and save each in a different project. You can view your
projects by opening them one at a time.
To Open a Project
Use the following steps to open a project.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File and then click Open.
OR
Click the Open button
on the tab.
3. Double-click the project. The last saved map view for that project displays.
OR
90
Using Projects and Map Files
Click the project to select it and then click Open. The last saved map view for that
project displays.
You can also:
•
Open a project by clicking the Open button
•
Open a project by dragging and dropping the project into DeLorme Topo North America
on the toolbar.
from Windows Explorer.
•
View the most recently saved projects by clicking File, Recent Files, and then clicking
the project you want to open on the Map Files tab.
•
Click the arrow next to the toolbar button to open a menu. Then, click Open Topo
Project to open the Open File dialog box OR click a recently saved project in the list.
Editing a Project
As you create new routes and draw objects, they are added to the current project. You can
also pan and zoom the map as needed, and then save all these project changes.
To Add/Delete Files Contained in a Project
Use the following steps to add or delete specific files contained in a particular project in
DeLorme Topo North America using the Map Files tab.
1. Open a project.
2. Click File, click Current View, and then click Contents to view the contents of the
project.
•
To add a file, click Add and then click Draw Files or Route Files. Then
select the file you want to add to the current project.
Note If a file is added to a project and then changed later, the file is updated
in every project it has been added to.
•
To remove a route or draw file from a project, select that file and then click
Remove.
Note This process does not delete the file; it just removes it from the current
project.
3. Click File and then click Save.
OR
Click the Save button
. Projects have .tpx extensions and are saved by default in
C:\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
91
Topo USA User Guide
Note Under the tree menu, you can use the check box next to each draw or route file to
display or hide it in the current map view.
Saving a Project
Use the Map Files tab to save each of your projects quickly and easily using one of the
following methods:
•
Click File and then click Save or click the Save button
o
.
If you have not saved the project before, the Save File dialog box opens.
Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save.
o
If you have saved the project before, the Save dialog box opens. All of the
changes made to the current project display as a check list. Select the check
box next to each change you want to save and clear the check box next to
each change you do not want to save. Click Yes to save the selected changes,
click No to save the file without the changes, or click Cancel to cancel the
saving process.
•
Click File and then click Save As.
The Save File dialog box opens. Type a file name in the File Name text box and click
Save.
You can also click the Save button
on the toolbar.
Creating Transfer Files
A project and its contents can be packaged into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate emailing or copying.
You can create a transfer file with or without hyperlinked file attachments. When you create
a transfer file with hyperlinked files, you have the option of saving the common directory
structure of the hyperlinked files. Saving the directory structure of common files can be
helpful when you are sharing and updating transfer files. Note Transfer files do not include
map data.
To Create a Transfer File
Use the following steps to create a transfer file in DeLorme Topo North America.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the project you want to create as a transfer file.
92
Using Projects and Map Files
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
4. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme
Docs\Projects.
5. Click Create.
Your file is created and saved in the specified location.
To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with
Hyperlinked Files
When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files, you can select to maintain part
of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive location.
Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the project you want to create as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create.
The Select Hyperlinked Files dialog box opens.
93
Topo USA User Guide
4. Verify the Include Hyperlink Files for Transfer check box is selected.
If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file, clear this check box
and go to step 8.
5. Under File Options, select Maintain Directory Info to save the directory structure
of the hyperlinked files.
If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked files in the
transfer file, select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to step 7.
6. Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files (up to the folder
location that you want to maintain) in the text box.
OR
Click the Browse button
and browse to the common base directory location.
7. Under Select Files to Be Included, clear the check box next to each file you do not
want to include in your transfer file.
8. Click OK.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
9. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme
Docs\Projects.
10. Click Create.
Your file is created and saved in the specified location. The default location for
imported transfer file attachments is C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files.
Importing Transfer Files
You can package a project and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate emailing or copying. You can also import transfer files, allowing you to share your
projects with other DeLorme users.
You can import a transfer file with or without attached hyperlink files. When you create a
transfer file with hyperlinked files, you can choose to maintain the directory information of
common files. By doing this, the recipient of the transfer file can keep a similar directory
structure as the creator. This is helpful when a transfer file is shared and updated between
users. Note Transfer files do not include map data.
To Import a Transfer File
Use the following steps to import a transfer file, including transfer files that have been emailed to you by other DeLorme users.
94
Using Projects and Map Files
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The default location is C:\DeLorme
Docs\Projects. Browse to another location as needed. Transfer files have .dmt
extensions.
3. Click a file to select it.
The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import to finish the import process.
The imported project opens and displays in the map view.
To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files
Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file attachments.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The default location is C:\DeLorme
Docs\Projects. Browse to another location as needed. Transfer files have .dmt
extensions.
3. Click a file to select it.
The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import.
The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
5. Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files.
The default location is C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files.
6. Click OK.
The imported project opens and displays in the map view.
Emailing a Transfer File
You can package a project and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate emailing or copying.
Note Transfer files do not include map data.
To Email a Transfer File
This procedure creates an attachment file, but does not permanently save a file to
C:\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Use the following steps to email a transfer file.
95
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the project you want to email as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click E-mail.
A transfer file is created and your computer's default operating system email
program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment.
4. Complete the email in accordance with your email system.
96
Finding a Location on the Map
Find Options
Use the Find tab in the Options dialog box to set your preferences when you use GPS Radar
to find POIs when tracking with GPS.
To Set GPS Radar Find Options
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the Find tab.
2. Select your preferences:
•
•
Calculate the distance to objects by–The method to search for objects.
•
Select Road to calculate the distance by road.
•
Select Direct to calculate the distance as the crow flies.
miles–The search distance (for a
Search area equals
road search) or radius (for a direct search). Select the distance from the
drop-down list.
The results returned are based on the calculation method. For example, if you
are looking for gas stations and you have set your calculation method as Road
and the search area for 10 miles, the results will not show you gas stations
that are 10 miles or less in distance as the crow flies if the distance to get to
them by road is more than 10 miles.
•
Search only in direction of travel–Select the check box if you want to
search only in the direction you are traveling (when you are moving).
•
Repeat the search every
minute(s)–The interval at
which to repeat the search. Select the check box and then select the number
of minutes from the drop-down list. You can also start or stop the search
repeat with the Repeat Timer
button on the GPS Radar subtab. The
repeat search status you select is saved when you close the program, but to
start the timer you must click the Search button on the GPS Radar subtab. If
you click Stop Search on the GPS Radar tab or Stop Radar in NavMode, the
timer is turned off. Note You must enable the repeat option to use GPS
Radar with NavMode.
97
Topo USA User Guide
•
Only repeat search when GPS is tracking–Select the check box if
you want to suspend searching when the GPS is disabled.
•
Only highlight the selected object–Select the check box to highlight only
the selected result on the map, rather than all results.
•
Enable voice reporting–Select the check box to allow voice reporting of
results.
•
Report:
–From the drop-down box, select the
option for reporting.
•
Interrupt report for new search results–Select this check box if
you want a new result to interrupt voice reporting.
To restore the default settings, click Use Defaults.
Find Overview
There are four Find options you can use to search for and locate places and other map
items.
•
QuickSearch–Search for places, addresses, cities/towns, ZIP/Postal Codes, and
coordinate positions. If the item you are looking for is not recognized, the Advanced
tab displays automatically.
•
POIs–Search for specific points of interest, such as hotels, restaurants, hospitals,
department stores, etc. Search a specified distance from the current map center or
along an active route.
•
GPS Radar–Search for points of interestand waypoints within a designated distance
from your current location while tracking a route with a GPS receiver. Before you use
GPS Radar, check the Find settings in the Options dialog box.
•
Advanced–Control what you are looking for with the Find field, and where you are
looking for it with the Within field while you conduct a more detailed search.
Performing a Basic Search
Use the QuickSearch tab to locate trails, mountains, addresses, cities, and more. To search
for other items, such as an area codes, street intersections, or a category (such as Park,
Interstate, and so on), use the Advanced subtab.
To Perform a Basic Search
98
Finding a Location on the Map
Follow the steps below to use the QuickSearch subtab.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch button.
OR
Press CTRL+F on your keyboard.
2. Type a major trail name, mountain name, address, ZIP/Postal Code, town name,
coordinate, draw object label, address book contact name, street intersection, etc. in
the Search For text box. See Searching Tips for a description of input formats.
OR
Select From Address Book from the Search For drop-down list to find an address
book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK.
Notes
•
The Book check box (under the Address Book buttons) must be selected to
search for address book contacts. For more information, see Searching for
Address Book Contacts.
•
Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or six characters for
a Postal Code search (you do not need to include spaces in a Postal Code).
•
Address searches should be in the following formats: street address, city,
state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code OR street address, city, state,
Zip/Postal Code.
3. Click Search. If your search is:

Very Successful
The results list displays and, if there is one excellent match, the map centers
on that place. A MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected. The
only time a MapTag is not placed is when you find and then go to a labeled
area that has no single map point associated with it (for example, a large
park).

Successful
The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list of search results
until you find the one you want to locate. To center an item on the map,
double-click it or select it and then click Go To. A MapTag displays if the
MapTags check box is selected.
Tip Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without
adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on
viewing results, see Tips on Viewing Search Results.
99
Topo USA User Guide

Not Successful
The Advanced dialog area displays. The program makes its best guess about
the type of search you were trying and your search word(s) display in the
upper-right text box. Click Search to proceed. For more information, see
Performing an Advanced Search.
Tips
•
Use a comma to separate city and state/country (Atlanta, Georgia; Montreal,
Canada), major point of interest and state (Mt Washington, NH), parts of an address
(444 E Pk Drive, Milford, CT or 444 E Pk Dr, 06460), or coordinate points (N 43.8, W
70.2).
•
You can find major landmarks or points of interest, such as Yellowstone National
Park and Mount Rushmore, without using the state as part of the search criteria.
•
Separate street intersections with an ampersand (Congress St & High St, Portland,
ME or Congress St & High St, 04101).
•
Avoid entering a period in your text.
•
Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop-down list of previously used search
words and examples.
•
The Search For drop-down list keeps a history of your successful search words
during a session and between sessions. To delete your search history, select Clear
History from the drop-down list. Click No to delete the search history in the
QuickSearch drop-down list. Click Yes to delete the search history in both the
QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs.
•
Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard; center
a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result as a
MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book Entry; preview a
result on the Handheld Export tab; or assign it a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just
right-click a search result and click the option.
Performing an Advanced Search
The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by controlling
what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking for it using the
Within field.
•
100
The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find selection.
Finding a Location on the Map
•
Type text in the fields and use the drop-down list to see examples and your recent
searches.
•
The fill-in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find and
Within selections.
You can also search for more types of items than you can in the QuickSearch tab, such as
by category, street intersection, and more.
To Perform an Advanced Search
Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
Note This screen automatically displays if you performed an unsuccessful
QuickSearch.
2. From the Find drop-down list, select the Find type.
When more than one match is available, the closest match displays first in the
Results list.
Click a Find type in the list below for more information.
•
Name
Use Name to locate a city, town, landmark, object label, and so on.
•
Street Address
Use Street Address to locate by street number and name, highway number,
and so on.
You can use standard abbreviations like Rd (Road), St (Street or Saint), Mt
(Mount), Dr (Drive), and Ct (Court).
•
Street Intersection
Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads.
•
ZIP/Postal Code(s)
Use at least a partial ZIP/Postal Code to locate the covered regions. The
results display in a browse list.
Use at least a partial ZIP/Postal Code to locate the covered regions. The
results are displayed in a browse list. This means you are taken into the
ZIP/Postal Code database at the closest matching, valid ZIP/Postal Code. You
can browse through results in either direction.
101
Topo USA User Guide
Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions. The results are
displayed in a browse list.
•
Name and/or Category
Searches for a specific name in a specific category. For example, if you want
to find a particular trail in a state, type the name of the trail in the Name text
box, type trail in the Keywords text box, and then type a state name or
abbreviation in the State box.
For more information on category searches, see Keywords for Category
Searches.
Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.
•
Category
Searches for a category of items within the specified area. For more
information on category searches, see Keywords for Category Searches.
Notes
•
In all category searches, the Keywords field is optional. If the
Keywords field is left blank, all objects in the selected Within area
display in the Results list.
•
•
Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.
Area Code and Exchange
There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search. Use at least
a partial Area Code and Exchange to locate the covered regions. This is not an
individual phone search. The results display in a browse list.
•
Latitude/Longitude
A single result is returned using a latitude/longitude coordinate search. There
are no Within options. Coordinates must be in one of the many formats
recognized by the program and are based on your Display settings in the
Options dialog box.
3. From the Within drop-down list, select an option. Available choices are based on
what you selected as your Find type.
Click a Within type in the following list for more information.
•
North America
Searches for a name in North America.
102
Finding a Location on the Map
Performing a POI Search
The POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking for.
You can search over four million places of interest including Wal-Mart stores, post offices,
hospitals, DeLorme Atlas & Gazetteer POIs, and much more.
•
Some POIs contain extended information, such as website links, hours of operation, and
so on. To view this extended information, right-click the POI search result, point to
Add, and then click Detailed MapNote to view the information on the map. Or, rightclick the POI search result and click Info to view the extended information in the Info
tab.
•
POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map. To see all
POIs on the map, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu
arrow and click Options), click the Map Features tab, select the Points of Interest
(Minor) and the Business Points of Interest (Minor) check boxes, and click OK.
To Find a Point of Interest
Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the POIs subtab.
3. Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for (for example, Wal-Mart
or Sheraton) in the Name text box.
4. Type the category that best fits your POI name (for example, type Hotel if you are
searching for a Sheraton, type Department Store if you are searching for WalMart) in the Keywords text box. See Keywords for Category Searches for more
information.
OR
Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop-down list examples and
history.
5. Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box. Type the number of
miles followed by "mi" — for example, 5 mi.
6. Select From Map Center or Along Current Route.
7. Click Search. If your search is:
103
Topo USA User Guide

Very Successful–The results list displays and, if there is one excellent
match, the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the
location of the POI match.

Successful–The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list of
search results until you find the one you want to locate. To center an item on
the map, double-click it or select it and then click Go To.
Tips
•
Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a
MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on viewing results, see
Tips on Viewing Search Results.
•
Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard; center a
search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result as a MapTag,
MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book Entry; or assign it a start, stop,
or finish in a route. Just right-click a search result and click the option.
Finding Points of Interest Near Your Current Location
Use the GPS Radar option on the Find tab to search for points of interest (POIs) such as gas
stations, restaurants, accommodations, rest areas, and so on near your current location (if
tracking with a GPS) or near the current map center when viewing another location.
You can also search for waypoints. If you enable voice reporting on the Find tab in the
Options dialog box, you can hear the nearest search result. Once you find the waypoint or
POI you want, you can use the GPS Radar subtab to center the map on the route on that
point or POI and get directions to it.
What you need to know
•
Before you start, set your Find preferences in the Options dialog.
•
A GPS Radar search finds items that are the shortest driving distance from your current
location—within just a few miles. Unless you select the Only in Direction of Travel
check box, some of the search results may be behind you. GPS radar calculates a route
to each point and the fastest destination for you to drive to is listed first. If you are on a
one-way road or freeway, GPS Radar takes into account the fact that you need to drive
further to get off at an exit. You can click each item in the result list to see each option,
to highlight the route to each destination, and to see a description of each one as well
as driving directions. This should help you choose the best one for your needs.
104
Finding a Location on the Map
•
The time required for a GPS Radar search varies by the distance, density of objects in
the area, the categories chosen, and whether you are searching only in the direction of
travel.
•
In GPS tab view, click the Stop Search button to interrupt a long search and see a
listing of the nearby points. Driving directions will not be provided. Voice reporting
will stop.
•
In GPS NavMode, GPS Radar results display in an orange status bar at the bottom of
the map area and long searches are automatically interrupted; click the More Info
button on the orange status bar to open the GPS Radar subtab and adjust your
settings for a shorter search.
•
Important To enable GPS Radar in NavMode, you must select the Repeat Search
Every check box and enter the number of minutes for repeating the search on the
Find tab in the Options dialog box. Select the check box and then select the number
of minutes from the drop-down list. You can also start or stop the search repeat with
the Repeat Timer button
on the GPS Radar subtab. The repeat search status
you select is saved when you close the program, but to start the timer you must click
the Search button on the GPS Radar subtab. Note You must enable the repeat
search option to use GPS Radar with NavMode.
To Find Points Near Your Location
Use the following steps to find points near your location.
1. Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find tab in the Options dialog box.
2. In the program's tab area, click the Find tab.
3. Click the GPS Radar subtab button.
4. From the Find drop-down list, select the category to search (for example, Gas
Stations, Restaurants, etc.).
OR
From the Find drop-down list, select Custom and then click the Custom button. In
the Radar dialog, type a keyword or phrase to search for a specific point or to search
for multiple POI types, such as "Chinese restaurant or Mexican restaurant."
To use the Custom search to search for waypoints, use search general or specific
terms such as "draw symbol," "map pin," or "waypoint."
105
Topo USA User Guide
5. To turn the search repeat on or off click the Repeat Timer button
(this button
controls the Repeat Search Every check box on the Find tab in the Options dialog
box). Search repeat must be enabled to use GPS NavMode.
6. Click Search.
The search results display in the list box.
7. Click a search result to select it.
A green, highlighted line displays on the map between your current/specified location
and the point of interest's location.
Note Click Recenter to center the map on the selected point in the route. Click
Insert Stop to insert the selected search result into your current route.
8. Select the Info option to view the information about the point, including the distance
from the current location.
OR
Select the Directions option to view directions to the point from your
current/specified location.
Tutorial: Find Points of Interest on a Route
Use GPS Radar to find the closest point of interest to your current location as you travel
along a route.
In this tutorial, you are creating a route on the toolbar and using NavMode to navigate with
the route. You want GPS Radar to find gas stations along your route as you travel.
Step 1—Get ready
Use the program to create a route using your current GPS location as the route start point
and an address book entry as your finish.
Step 2—Set your preferences
Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find tab in the Options dialog box.
106
Finding a Location on the Map
•
Select Road to calculate the distance you will have to travel by road to reach the
result.
•
Select the Repeat search every... check box (required for NavMode) and select
how often you want to repeat the search.
•
Select the Only in Direction of Travel check box so you don't have to back track to
make your next stop—if you're driving in a very rural area, you may not want to use
this feature because the closest point of interest may be behind you.
•
Select the Enable voice reporting check box and then select what you want
reported from the Report drop-down list.
Step 3—Start the GPS
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Launch DeLorme Topo North America.
3. Make sure the NavMode button
4. Click the GPS button
on the toolbar is on (appears indented).
on the toolbar to start your GPS.
Note If you do not see the GPS button on the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and
select the GPS/NavMode option.
Step 4—Pick what you want to search for
107
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Find tab (it is minimized at the bottom of the screen) and click GPS Radar.
2. From the Find list, select Gas Stations.
3. Click Search.
4. Minimize the tab area.
Step 5—Start driving
The computer speaks the route directions as you drive. If you are using speech recognition
software, you can ask the computer questions like, "What is the next turn?" or "Where am
I?" NavMode displays your search results in the orange bar below the map.
Finding a Symbol by its Name
Within the Draw tab, you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map. For more
information on adding symbols to the map, see Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, or
Text Label to the Map.
108
Finding a Location on the Map
You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using the
QuickSearch feature on the Find tab. For example, if you named a symbol "My House" when
you placed it on the map, use the following steps for conducting a search on the unique
symbol name.
To Find a Symbol by its Name
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Using QuickSearch, type the symbol name followed by the town and state
abbreviation (for example, My Office, Yarmouth, ME) in the Search For text box.
3. Click Search. The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search
For text box. The symbol name displays in the Name column.
4. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on
the map. The map view centers on the item. A MapTag displays the symbol name at
the symbol location.
Note To display MapTags, select the MapTags check box on the Find tab.
Tips on Viewing Search Results
These tips can help you view Find tab search results.
•
To make it easier to view a long list of search results, increase the height of the tab
by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase (up) tab height
arrow
•
at the top of the tab.
To sort results by another column, click the column header. An arrow identifies the
sort column. Click a second time to reverse the sort order.
Note This feature is not available when in browse mode; see last item in this list.
•
To copy the information for the selected item or items, press CTRL+C on your
keyboard. You can then paste the text into another program, such as a word
processing program.
•
Right-click an item in the results list to display the following options:

Copy to Clipboard–Copies the detailed information for the selected item or
items and is available for pasting into another program.

Go To–Centers the map on the selected item.

Select All–Selects all items in the list and highlights up to 350 on the map. If
you right-click again with all items selected, you can select Copy to
109
Topo USA User Guide
Clipboard; point to Add and then click MapTag, MapNote, Detailed
MapNote, Address Book Entry, or Waypoint; or point to Route and click
Insert Stop. You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected
to add a MapTag.

Add–Adds a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Address Book Entry, or
Waypoint for the selected item or items. You must have the MapTags
checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag.

Route–Places a start, stop, or finish point at that location on the map based
on your selection. The location is listed in the Start text box, Stop text box, or
Finish text box in the Route tab.

Preview in Handheld–Preview the selected search results on the Handheld
Export tab. This helps you select grids for exporting a map.
•
To locate an item on the map without moving the map, single click an item in the
results list. It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map view. This
is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want but point labels
are not displaying.
Notes To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking up to
350 items in the results list. If the items are listed continuously, click the first item in
the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want.
•
You can adjust column widths. The new size is retained until changed again. You
cannot rearrange the column order. Different search types result in different column
orders.
•
There are two types of results lists:

Most searches provide a fixed number of results. If all of
Scroll
Browse
the results do not fit in the screen area, a scroll bar
Bar
Buttons
automatically displays.

Some searches provide results you can browse. This means
the entire database displays with the best match
highlighted. It is possible to continue browsing to the first
or last item in the database.
Keywords for Category Searches
110
Finding a Location on the Map
Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both general
and specific searches using category keywords. Try entering words that seem appropriate.
Keyword Samples
The list below shows a few of the categories that you can enter that will expand to reveal
sample keywords. Sample keywords may be listed in more than one category.
Click a category below to view its sample keywords. Click the link again to hide the sample
keywords.
You can also click Show All to see all keywords.
Boundaries, Map, and Surveying
Border
Boundary
Contour
Crosshair
Grid
Line
Point
ZIP/Postal Code
Buildings and Structures
Airport
Bridge
Business
Landmark
Library
Businesses
Hotel
Gasoline
Restaurant
Pizza
Education and Cultural
111
Topo USA User Guide
College
Local Park
Park
School
State Park
University
Atlas & Gazetteer
Camping or RV Park
Department Store or Mall
Farm
Geographic Feature
Golfing
Landmark
Library
Park
Tourist Attraction
Miscellaneous
Cemetery
Hiking
Mine
Note
Park
Natural Features
Beach
Canyon
Crater
Desert
Forest
Glacier
Hill
112
Finding a Location on the Map
Island
Mountain
River
Stream
Valley
Water
Object Types
All of the stock draw symbols (such as blue map pin, red flag, canoe, etc.)
Draw symbols
Objects in non-DeLorme data
Roads and Trails
Bridge
Exit
Ferry
Foot Trail
Highway
Hiking
Interstate
One Way
Railroad
Road
Street
Trail
Tunnel
Travel Amenities
Airport
Exit
Landmark
Rest Area
Unique Natural Features
113
Topo USA User Guide
Geographic Feature
Landmark
Locale
Mining
Trail
Park or Other Open Space
Tourist Attraction
Notes on Category Searches
The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category searches.
•
Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length.
•
Keywords are not case-sensitive.
•
Some generic keywords (water, for example) match many categories and display a
dialog box with specific categories. Select or clear these categories, depending on
what you want to locate.
•
In the Keyword Category samples below, some keywords are used together to
narrow the search. The following two examples provide information on how results
may differ using words together and separately:
•
Example 1–Using Local Road provides many category results, such as Ferry
Crossing Local Road, Local or Rural Road, and Railroad Local Line.
•
Example 2–Using Road provides over 100 results from more categories.
•
Partial words are recognized when performing a search.
•
You can use keywords in any order. You get the same results using Local Road as for
Road Local.
•
A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the word.
•
Use the word "or" in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories. For
example, "pizza" or "fast food."
MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting
When you search for and go to a Find
search result, a yellow MapTag displays
at that location if the MapTags check
box on the Find tab is selected. If
114
Finding a Location on the Map
MapTags are cluttering your view of the
map, you can move the text area of the
MapTag, hide them from view, or delete
one, several, or all MapTags.
To Convert MapTags to MapNotes
To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes, which can be retained when you
save the project, right-click the map, click Manage Draw, and then click Convert All
MapTags to MapNotes. A new draw layer called MapNotes is created in your project.
To Move a MapTag
You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point; you can move only the text area.
Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area.
1. Use the Find tab, search for a place, street address, coordinate, category item, or
street intersection. MapTags are placed on the map at each point you locate.
2. Click the Select tool
.
3. Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the position on
the map where you want it. The anchor point does not move.
4. Click the Select tool again to resume normal map operations.
To Hide MapTags
The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map.
•
MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box is selected.
•
MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared. Select the
MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags.
To Delete MapTags
You can delete one, several, or all MapTags.
To delete MapTags from the Find tab:
•
To delete one MapTag, click the Select tool
Tag tool
, click the MapTag, click the Delete
, and click the Select tool again.
OR
Right-click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag.
115
Topo USA User Guide
•
To delete several MapTags, click the Select tool
, hold down the SHIFT key on
your keyboard while clicking the MapTags, click the Delete Tag
tool, and click
the Select tool again.
•
To delete all MapTags, click the Delete Tag tool
. A message box displays "Delete
all MapTags?" Click OK to confirm deletion. Click Cancel to retain all MapTags.
To delete MapTags from other tabs:
•
116
Right-click the MapTag and click Delete MapTag.
Using Address Book Contacts
Searching for Address Book Contacts
You have several ways to search for address book contacts:
•
Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a contact;
browse for the contact or type the name of the contact
•
Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start, stop, or
finish; browse for the contact or type the name of the contact
•
Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish; browse
for the contact or type the name of the contact
With these functions, you can select the <From Address Book> option from the applicable
drop-down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text box to find the
entry. If you type the name of the contact, you must select the Book check box in the Find
tab (underneath the Address Book buttons). To disable the address book search
functionality, clear the Book check box.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Importing Existing Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering
each record. Imported address book items are merged with your existing address book.
Items with identical names are not replaced during the import process.
To Import an Existing Address Book
Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on the
map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Import.
117
Topo USA User Guide
4. Click Browse to find the .dab, .txt, .csv, or .tab address book file. Click the file and
then click Open.
5. If the first line of the title contains column names, select the First Row is Header
check box.
6. If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information, select a
default column label from the available drop-down lists.
There is a list for Name, Street Address, City, State Abbreviation, ZIP/Postal Code,
Telephone, Latitude, Longitude. The information in your address book displays to the
right of these lists.
7. Click OK.
The address book contacts are imported into the program. All street address or
latitude/longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol
and the
name of the contact.
Note If your contacts do not display on the map, check the Located? column in the
Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was made. If Not Located
displays next to any of your records, either address/coordinate information was not
provided with the contact or the address/coordinate information could not be found
in the program.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Manually Entering Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering
each record.
You can also add an address book entry by right-clicking the map, selecting Create
Address Book Entry, and following steps 4–6 below. If you right-click the map at the
location for the address book entry, some of the information, such as coordinates, street
name, city, state, etc., automatically complete the Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry
dialog box.
To Manually Enter Address Book Information
Use the following steps to manually enter address book information.
118
Using Address Book Contacts
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click New.
The Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box opens.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. From the Update Location drop-down list, select the method for updating the
location on the map; From Street Address, From Lat/Lon, or No (if you do not
want to update the location.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for each contact you want to add.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact
You can center the map on any address book contact you have with the Go To function in
the Address Book dialog box.
To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact
Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the contact.
4. Click Go To.
The map centers on the selected contact.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
119
Topo USA User Guide
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book
Once you have imported your address book contacts, you may need to edit the information
if your contacts have moved, changed phone numbers, etc. Instead of importing the
information again, you can simply edit the information.
To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Double-click the record you want to edit.
OR
Click the record you want to edit and then click Edit.
4. Edit the applicable information.
5. If you want to move the contact, select the method to place it on the map from the
Update Location drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Manually Moving a Contact on the Map
Once you have created a contact in an address book, you can manually move it on the map
using the move address book entry function.
To Manually Move a Contact's Location on the Map
Use the following steps to manually move a contact's location on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Move Address Book Entry button
Your cursor changes to
contact.
120
.
when you hover over the location of an address book
Using Address Book Contacts
3. Click and drag the contact to a different location on the map.
The Located status for that record (in the Address Book dialog box) changes to
Manual.
4. Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map operations.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Relocating Address Book Contacts
Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application, you can
relocate your address book entries (except for manual entries) so they match the most
recent data. You are prompted to do this the first time you open the address book after
installing a new version of your application; however, if you do not relocate the entries at
that time, you can do it later.
Important If you do not relocate your address book, the entries may not be accurately
placed according to the latest DeLorme road data.
To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to relocate address book entries (except manual entries) on the
map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Relocate All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to relocate the entries.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book
121
Topo USA User Guide
Once you successfully create an address book, you can delete the contact information at
any time.
To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the record you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
6. Click Done.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map
Once you add contacts to your address book, you can show or hide the contact information
on the map.
To Show/Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map
Use the following steps to show/hide address book contacts on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and enable
address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
OR
Clear the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and disable
address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
122
Using Address Book Contacts
Deleting Your Entire Address Book
Once you have created an address book, you can delete the records it contains one at a
time or all at once.
To Delete an Entire Address Book
Use the following steps to delete an entire address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Clear All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to delete the address book.
5. Click Done.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Exporting Your Address Book
You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in the
Address Book dialog box. Exported address books are in DeLorme Address Book binary
format (*.dab) or comma-separated file (*.csv) format. Latitude and longitude values are
not exported.
To Export Your Address Book
Use the following steps to export your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Export.
The Save As dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book file.
5. Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box.
123
Topo USA User Guide
6. Select DeLorme Address Book (*.dab) or Comma-separated File (*.csv) from
the Save as Type drop-down list. DeLorme Address Book files retain all of their
information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme programs. Commaseparated files do not contain coordinate information. You can view text files in thirdparty applications such as Microsoft® Excel.
7. Click Save.
8. Click OK to acknowledge the export location.
9. Click Done.
Notes
•
The address book has a 200-record limit.
•
You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
•
You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
124
Printing
Printing a Map
You can print a 2-D or 3-D map based on your paper size or screen size. If you choose to
print a map based on your paper size, you can also print a multi-page map that you can
assemble using the Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map instructions.
To Print a Map
Use the following steps to print a map.
1. Locate the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab.
3. Click the Map subtab.
4. Under Map, select Left map, Right map, or Both maps.
Note If the left or right and/or both options are unavailable, it is because only one
map view is displayed. To make all selections available, use the map resize tool to
expose the left and right map views. To print a full-page 3-D map, use the map
resize tool to expose only the left map window.
5. Under Print Layout, select Page (the map print area is based on the paper size you
have specified in the Setup options) or Screen (the map print area is based on the
screen size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map, which may not
always be visible. The overview map and the print area for a Screen map display as
a blue box on the overview map.
6. If you selected Screen in step 5, go to step 7. If you selected Page in step 5, select
your options and then go to step 7.
•
Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3). The print
area displays on both the map and the overview map.
•
If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 on the map layout graphic, and you do not want
to print all the pages in the multi page map, click each page you do not want
to print. The page appears dimmed or gray. (You can click a dimmed/gray
page again to print it.)
Note In the example below, page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map.
•
Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print.
125
Topo USA User Guide
•
If not, pan the map to a new location and zoom to the correct level.
OR
•
To change the photo zoom, select an option from the Photo Zoom
drop-down list or type the photo zoom in the text box.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map features
and changes the map print area. If you increase the photo zoom level,
map text, lines, symbols, etc. display larger and your map print area is
reduced. If you decrease the photo zoom level, map text, lines,
symbols, etc. display smaller and your map print area is enlarged. The
reduction/enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display
under the Photo Zoom drop-down list.
•
If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print
area or other settings, select the Lock Print Center check box. Selecting this
check box locks the print area and changes the tab label to red.
•
Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire
print area. Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level.
•
Add text or graphics to your map
7. To change printers or make choices for transparent/yellow background, paper
orientation, paper size, and paper source, click Setup. The Print Setup dialog opens.
Note From the Setup dialog box, click Properties to view additional options. If the
options are available, set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType
fonts to print as graphics. Consult your printer manual for additional information.
8. Click the Print button to print your map.
Tips
•
To save a map to a file, see Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image.
•
To adjust the print area of a Page map, select the Lock Print Center check box,
select the Select tool
, and then drag the frame to the new position.
Printing a Route and Directions
You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create.
Additionally, you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file. For more
information, see Saving Route Directions as Text.
For specific recommendations on best printing results, see your printer manual.
126
Printing
To Print a Route
Use the following steps to print an existing route.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
Note If you do not have a route on this project, the route options are unavailable.
2. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer, change
printer properties, select a transparent/yellow background, select paper size, and
select paper orientation. Click OK when finished.
If the options are available under Printer Properties, set the graphics mode to use
raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics.
3. Select the route you want to print from the Name drop-down list. Only routes
contained in the current project display in this list.
4. Under Options, select from one of the following choices:
•
Overview–Provides an optimized map of your route and the route
summary—trip distance, trip time, start, total stops, and finish.
•
Travel Package–Provides maps of the route with corresponding directions.
•
Turn Details–Prints 2" x 2" maps of each of the turns in your route
directions.
•
Directions–Provides action-based directions (turn, merge, bear, depart,
arrive, and continue) including the time frame for each action.
Note You can save route directions as a text file.
•
Along the Way–Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find search
within a current route. The search results are listed as they are listed in the
Find results. The Along the Way option is only available if you have recently
performed a find/category within current route search in the Advanced Find
subtab. For more information, see Performing an Advanced Search.
•
Strip Maps–Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the route
along with directions that appear in the map margin. Strip maps are not
printed North Up like other printed maps. They are printed so that the
direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map.
5. If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4, select the miles per page that
you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop-down list.
Note When setting the number of miles per page, keep in mind that the number of
127
Topo USA User Guide
miles is not the distance of the route. Instead, it equals the width of the strip map
and determines the scale of the map.
6. Select Increasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to end the route
directions with the total time and distance.
OR
Select Decreasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to start the
directions with the total time and distance — similar to a countdown.
7. Optional. To view a preview of your selection, click View.
8. Click Print.
Printing a Profile
You can print a profile you have created.
To Print a Profile
Use the following steps to print a profile.
1. Create a profile.
2. Click the Print tab and click the Profile subtab to display the Profile options.
3. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer, change
printer properties, select paper size, and select paper orientation. Click OK when
finished.
4. Under Profile, select On Map or Profile Only. If you select On Map, select whether
you want to print the profile as shown on the Left or Right map.
IF you
THEN you will print...
select this
option...
On Map
The background map with the main Profile graph at the
bottom of the page.
Profile Only
The main Profile graph without the map.
Note Click the Copy to Clipboard button
to copy
your profile to the clipboard so that you can paste it
into a graphics program such as Microsoft Paint or
Adobe Photoshop. When you copy the map to the
clipboard, the map is saved at current monitor
128
Printing
resolution.
5. If you want to print all of the profile's Statistical Data Options, select the Profile
Stats check box.
The statistics are printed on the same page as the profile.
6. Optional. Click the Save button
to save your profile as a bitmap or JPEG image.
Rename the file (if necessary) and click Save.
7. Optional. To view a preview of your selection, click View.
8. Click Print to print the map using the selected print options.
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map
You can add text (framed or unframed) and graphics (north arrows, scale bars, images) to
your map.
•
To modify the properties of a text/graphic item, click the Select tool
and click the
item on the map.
•
To make graphic items added to your map the same size, press and hold the SHIFT key
on your keyboard or drag to select two items, right-click, select Make Same Size, and
select Width, Height, or Both from the menu.
•
After you add text/graphic items to your map, you can align, snap, or layer them on the
map.
To Add Text to Your Map
Use the following steps to add text to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Framed Text tool
.
OR
Click the Unframed Text tool
.
5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your text. A text box displays.
When not in editing mode, you can reposition your text by dragging the text box to
the new position.
129
Topo USA User Guide
6. Type the text in the text box. To type more than one line of text, press
SHIFT+ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line. Press the ENTER key on
your keyboard when finished typing your text.
7. Under Layout Tools, select the font, style, and size for your text from the dropdown lists.
8. To underline your text, click the Underline tool
.
9. To change the color of your text, click the Font Color tool
. From the Color dialog
box, you can:
•
Click to select an alternative color. Click OK when finished.
•
Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning
red/green/blue or hue/sat/lum values. Click Add to Custom Colors and then
click OK.
10. Click the Align Left button
to align the text in your text box to the left.
OR
Click the Center button
to align the text in the center of the text box.
OR
Click the Align Right button
to align the text in your text box to the right.
11. Click the Text Box Size button
if you want the size of your text box to grow with
the amount of text typed.
The Text Box Size button is a toggle button. If the button is not activated, any text
placed on the map is placed in a default-sized text box. You can resize the default
size text box by selecting the text box on the map and dragging any of the white
boxes on the corners/sides of text box.
To Add a North Arrow to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the North Arrow tool
130
. All of the North Arrow styles display to the right.
Printing
5. Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you want
to add the graphic.
Once you place the North Arrow on the map, you can resize it by dragging any of the
white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic. Reposition the North Arrow at any
time by dragging the graphic to the new position.
To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Scale Bar tool
. All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right.
5. Select the check box to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select the
Scale Bar style.
AND/OR
Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the scale reference length
on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the map.
6. Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic.
Once you place the Scale Bar on the map, you can resize it by dragging any of the
white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic.
To Add an Image to Your Map
Use the following steps to add an image to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
131
Topo USA User Guide
4. Click the Image tool
.
5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your image. The Select Image
File dialog box opens.
You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position.
6. Select an image file (.jpg, .bmp, or .gif) to place on your map and then click Open.
The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text box next to the
Image tool under Layout Tools.
You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button
and
browsing to an alternative image.
7. Select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image's width-toheight ratio while resizing.
8. Select the Preview Image check box to preview the image on the map.
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can use the right-click options to align
each object with a certain location on the map.
Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map. For more information, see
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard, click each text/graphic item on the
map.
OR
Drag your mouse over the text/graphic items on the map to select multiple items at
once.
4. Right-click one of the items, point to Align, and then click:
•
Left to align the left sides of all of the items; placement is based on the left
side of the left-most item.
•
Right to align the right sides of all of the items; placement is based on the
right side of the right-most item.
•
Top to align the top side of all of the items; placement is based on the top
side of the top-most item.
132
Printing
•
Bottom to align the bottom side of all of the items; placement is based on
the bottom side of the bottom-most item.
•
Vertical Center to center the items based on the average of the vertical
placement of the items.
•
Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the
horizontal placement of the items.
•
Center to center the items based on the center of the average area that the
items cover on the map.
•
Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other.
•
Stack Horizontally to position the items side-by-side.
Tips
•
To make multiple graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard
and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same Size, and click Width,
Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the largest
item is always the basis for the size change.
Important For an item to be made the same size as another item, the item must not
be locked—for example, the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box should be cleared for any
images, only text items with default size text boxes can be resized, and so on.
•
To delete multiple text or graphic items, click the Edit tool, drag the mouse on the map
to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press the DELETE key on your
keyboard.
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can snap each item to the location you
want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging the item to snap it
to the horizontal center of the page.
To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while dragging
the text/graphic items on the map.
To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map.
1. Add text or graphics to your map.
2. Drag each text/graphic item you placed on the map to the location you want them on
the map. If you drag an item to the edge of the map print area, the text/graphic
133
Topo USA User Guide
snaps to the edge. If you drag the item to the horizontal center of the edge of the
map print area, the text/graphic snaps to the center of the edge. You can also drag
the item to the center of the map print area to snap it to the center of the printed
map.
Tips
To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your
•
keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, select Make Same Size, and click
Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the
largest item is always the basis for the size change.
To delete multiple text/graphic items, select the Edit tool, drag the mouse in a down-
•
right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press
the DELETE key on your keyboard.
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map
You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map. In this case, use the
right-click Bring to Front/Send to Back options so that each can still be displayed.
To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map
Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map (see Adding Text or Graphics
to Your Map), placing the text/graphic items on top of each other.
3. If one of the text/graphic items you want to display is partially underneath another
text/graphic item, select the item you want to display, right-click, and click Bring to
Front.
To reverse this step, right-click the item and select Send to Back.
Tips
•
To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same Size, and click
Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the
largest item is always the basis for the size change.
•
To delete multiple text/graphic items, select the Edit tool, drag the mouse in a downright direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press
the DELETE key on your keyboard.
134
Printing
Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map
When you print a map, a yellow (or black if you are using High Contrast Colors) background
automatically displays on the printout. If you want a transparent background—for example,
if you are printing transparencies — you can change the Print settings to print with a
transparent background.
To Print Maps With a Transparent Background
Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, select the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a transparent background.
To Print Maps With a Yellow/Black Background
Use the following steps to turn on the yellow/black background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, clear the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a yellow background (or black if you are using High
Contrast Colors).
Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map
After you have printed the sheets for your multi-page map, you are ready to assemble the
map.
135
Topo USA User Guide
Before you begin, be sure you have a clear work surface large enough to accommodate the
final map size.
You will need the following tools to assemble your map:
•
Pencil
•
Razor knife
•
Straight-edge ruler (longer than the edge of the longest sheet)
•
Permanent tape (invisible or "magic" type)
•
Removable tape
To Manually Assemble a Multi-page Map
Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi-page map.
1. For each sheet that needs to be trimmed, mark the edges of the sheet to indicate the
areas to trim.
2. Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin black line
bordering the map.
Note For adjacent sheets, trim only one page. This makes piecing the sheets
together easier.
The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi-page map provide additional
information on where to trim the sheets. The arrows indicate the edges to be
trimmed.
2 x 2 multi-page Map
3 x 3 multi-page Map
136
Printing
3. Align two adjacent sheets, placing the trimmed edge on top of the non-trimmed
edge.
Notes
•
Piece together the multi-page map one seam at a time. This is especially
important for a 3 x 3 multi-page map.
•
Build the multi-page map from the inside out to minimize any misalignment.
4. Using two small pieces of removable tape, tack together the aligned sheets.
Note This is a temporary measure. Steps 6 through 10 describe how to completely
secure the sheets.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together.
6. With the multi-page temporarily pieced together, use small pieces of removable tape
to secure the corners and edges of the multi-page map.
137
Topo USA User Guide
Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges, not along the seams.
7. For each seam, fix the tape to the work surface, not on the sheet, so the tape is in
alignment with the seam.
8. Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam. Be careful not to let the
tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it (in step 9).
9. Keeping the length of the tape taut, carefully apply the tape to the seam until both
sides are fixed to the work surface.
10. Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together.
138
Printing
12. Using the straight-edge ruler, carefully trim the edges of the map at the seams
(where the tape is affixed to the workspace).
13. Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges. You are now ready to
display your multi-page map.
139
Using the Draw Tools
Draw Overview
You can add draw objects, such as routable roads, routable trails, waypoints, tracks, text,
symbols, MapNotes, images, lines, arcs, splines, circles, polygons, and rectangles to your
map with the tools provided in the Draw tab. You can save draw objects in a single draw file
or in multiple draw files. You can view draw files individually or with other draw files.
What is a draw file?
Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map. You can add various
objects to the draw file to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the map, but these
objects do not become part of the map. They exist in a draw file that overlays the map.
There are five different types of draw files: draw, road, trail, waypoint, and track. You can
create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other while still viewing the
map beneath. See Editing/Locking Draw Files.
When you clear or delete a draw file, the objects in the draw file do not display and are
deleted along with the draw file. When you create and save draw files, they are saved within
the current project.
Some additional draw file facts:
•
A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to the
map.
•
As you create draw files, they are added to the current project.
•
You can add draw files to multiple projects.
•
You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.
•
Draw files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw with the default name; for
example, DrawLayer#.an2, with # indicating the number order in which the file was
created. You can rename draw files to better identify your specific information. See
Creating a New Draw File.
•
You can have multiple draw files displaying at once while working on your map. Work
can be done on one draw file at a time, while viewing other files beneath it. You can
select different draw files to be the active, editable file from within the Draw tab. For
more information, see Editing/Locking Draw Files.
141
Topo USA User Guide
•
Draw files created in a particular project are displayed only if that project is currently
displaying. For example, if DrawLayer27 is created in a project named Yarmouth
Zoom 14 only, DrawLayer27 does not display if a project named Old Port is currently
displaying.
•
Routable roads and routable trails are not tied to a project; they do not change even
when a project is changed.
What are draw objects?
Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the Draw
tab. Draw objects consist of line, area, or point objects. You can copy, move, delete, and
add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another project.
•
•
•
Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points, such as:
•
Routable Roads
•
Routable Trails
•
Tracks
•
Lines
•
Arcs
•
Splines
Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects, such as:
•
Polygons
•
Rectangles
•
Circles
Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint, symbol,
MapNote, image, or text label. The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol
that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when
the symbol is placed.
Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape or allow you
to snap one object to another object. Points display and act in different ways within the
various draw objects. Click a link below to view additional information.
•
Points in Routable Roads, Routable Trails, Tracks, Lines, Splines, and Polygons
Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails, tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
142
Using the Draw Tools
•
Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object.
They give the object its shape. When you select a draw object on the map,
shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares.
The line object below was drawn with the spline tool.
•
End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw
object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line,
spline, or polygon:
•
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line
segment.
•
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment.
The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.
Notes
•
When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line
draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available (when
using the Polygon or Line tool) and selected, it displays the bearing or
angle of that point of the line, the length of the line segment (leg), and
the total length of the entire line object on the map.
•
When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon
draw object, a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the
line, the length of the line segment (leg), and the total area of the
polygon on the map.
Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails, tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
•
Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object.
They give the object its shape. When you select a draw object on the map,
shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares.
The line object below was drawn with the spline tool.
143
Topo USA User Guide
•
End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw
object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line,
spline, or polygon:
•
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line
segment.
•
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment.
The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.
Notes
•
When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line
draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available (when
using the Polygon or Line tool) and selected, it displays the bearing or
angle of that point of the line, the length of the line segment (leg), and
the total length of the entire line object on the map.
•
When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon
draw object, a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the
line, the length of the line segment (leg), and the total area of the
polygon on the map.
Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails, tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
•
Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object.
They give the object its shape. When you select a draw object on the map,
shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares.
The line object below was drawn with the spline tool.
•
End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw
object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line,
spline, or polygon:
•
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line
segment.
•
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment.
The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.
144
Using the Draw Tools
Notes
•
When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line
draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available (when
using the Polygon or Line tool) and selected, it displays the bearing or
angle of that point of the line, the length of the line segment (leg), and
the total length of the entire line object on the map.
•
When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon
draw object, a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the
line, the length of the line segment (leg), and the total area of the
polygon on the map.
•
Points in Rectangles, Circles, and Arcs
Draw objects such as rectangles, circles, and arcs also contain points, but they are
treated differently.
Rectangles–Contain shape points at the four corners, but the lines between the
shape points contain no editable end points. When you click one of these shape
points, a text box displays the width, height, and area of the rectangle on the map.
Circles–Contain no shape points, but have a central point that does not display until
you snap it (see Note below) to another object. Clicking the circle displays a central
crosshair within the circle and a text box containing information on the area and
radius of the circle on the map.
Arcs–Contain three shape points. When you click any of the points, a text box
displays the angle or bearing of the selected point, the radius of the arc, and the
total length of the arc line on the map.
Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc are
treated as start and end points (i.e., show red or green when clicked). The central
magenta shape point, or third point you placed, determines the shape of the arc.
Note For information on snapping a draw object to another draw object, see
Snapping Draw Objects.
•
Points in Point Draw Objects
Point objects, such as waypoints, symbols, and text, do not have shape or end
points. Text label objects contain a point at the bottom center of the text label box
and are only visible during a snap.
•
Points in MapNotes
145
Topo USA User Guide
MapNotes do not have shape or end points. They contain an anchor point at the end
of the text box. Clicking the MapNote displays a central crosshair at the anchor point.
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools
The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads, trails, waypoints, tracks, lines (straight
lines, arcs, and splines), shapes (polygons, rectangles, and circles), MapNotes, text labels,
images, and symbols to a draw file. Some of these tools are hidden tools available in pullout menus.
To View the Hidden Draw Tools
Five draw tool options have pull-out menus with hidden tools. These draw tools each have a
small arrow at the bottom-right of the draw tool button.
Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one of the
options. Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option.
Routable Road/Routable Trail Tool
Waypoints/Tracks Tool
Line/Arc/Spline Tool
Polygon/Rectangle/Circle Tool
MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image Tool
Draw File Management
Creating a New Draw File
There are five different types of draw files:
•
DrawLayer—Created when you add a line, arc, spline, circle, rectangle, polygon,
symbol, MapNote, or text label to the map.
•
RoadLayer—Created when you add a routable road.
•
TrailLayer—Created when you add a routable trail to the map.
•
WaypointLayer—Created when you add a waypoint to the map.
146
Using the Draw Tools
•
TrackLayer—Created when you add a track to the map.
A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and there are
no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current project.
You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.
To Create a New Draw File
Use the following steps to create a new draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click New and then click Draw, Road, Trail, Waypoint, or Track.
The new file is now the active draw file. Each draw file type has an active file.
3. Optional. If you want to rename the draw file:
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type the
new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not doubleclick). Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
4. Optional. If you want to ensure no changes are made to a particular draw file, select
the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note You can save new draw files any time. For more information, see Saving a Draw File.
Saving a Draw File
After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file, you can save them in a draw file that
you can view or edit later. Any time you edit a draw file, click Save to save your changes.
To Save a New Draw File
Use the following steps to save a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File.
3. Click Save.
Draw files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw with .an2 extensions.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
147
Topo USA User Guide
Deleting a Draw File
You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved.
To Delete a Draw File
Use the following steps to delete a draw file.
1. Open the project that contains the draw file you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type (for example, all
road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped together,
and so on).
4. Select a draw file from the file list and then click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Hiding Draw Files
You can hide draw files you created. This removes from view all the draw objects in that file
without permanently deleting them.
To Hide a Draw File
Use the following steps to hide a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type. For example, all
road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped together,
and so on.
3. Hide any files in the file list by clearing the check box next to the file name.
•
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.
•
A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
148
Using the Draw Tools
Editing/Locking Draw Files
You can edit the current active (editable) draw file. You can also lock a draw file, making it
uneditable.
To Edit a Draw File
Use the following steps to edit a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Verify the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map. A draw file with a
selected check box displays on the map.
4. Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
6. Click the Select tool
and then click the draw file object on the map that you
want to edit.
7. Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file.
8. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
To Lock a Draw File
Use the following steps to lock a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock.
Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files
You can export draw files as text files. Draw objects exported to text files contain coordinate
information for each line, area, or point object. You can open these text files in other
DeLorme products.
To Export Draw Files to Text Files
Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
149
Topo USA User Guide
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column shows
the active layers.
3. From the file list, click the draw file to export.
4. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
5. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of
C:\DeLorme Docs\Export
6. Select Text File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
7. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is root name of
the layer.
8. Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file.
9. Click Save
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Exporting Track Data Files to Text Files
You can export track files containing athletic data as text files. Tracks with athletic data
exported to text files contain the data from the device, such as speed, heart rate, etc.
To Export Track Data Files to Text Files
Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
Any draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column
shows the active layers.
3. From the file list, click the track file to export.
4. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
5. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of
C:\DeLorme Docs\Export.
6. Select Channel Data Text File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
7. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is root name of
the layer.
150
Using the Draw Tools
8. Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
You can export track or waypoint files as GPX files. GPX files derived from tracks contain the
elevation, time, and GPS status for each point in the track. GPX files derived from a
waypoint file include the waypoint name, comment, URL, lat/lon, elevation, time, GPS
status and the symbol name. You cannot export more than one waypoint/track layer into a
single GPX file.
To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file.
1. Open the project containing the track or waypoint file you want to export.
OR
Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column shows
the active layers.
4. Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list.
5. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
6. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of
C:\DeLorme Docs\Export.
7. Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
8. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is DrawExport.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Importing Files to Draw Files
You can import many types of files as draw files. The file items display as draw objects
within the draw file.
151
Topo USA User Guide
You can also use Earthmate GPS Sync to download waypoints and tracks to the Draw tab
from a PN-Series GPS; see the Help topics under Using DeLorme PN-Series GPS Devices for
more information.
See the chart at the end of this topic to learn what is imported for each type of file.
Important To add a track Draw file (*.an2), to a project, click the Add button on the Map
Files tab. For more information, see Editing a Project.
To Import Files
Use the following steps to import a file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click Import.
The Import Draw File dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the source folder of the file. The default location is C:\DeLorme
Docs\Export
5. From the Files of type drop-down list, select the type of file you want to import.
6. If you selected Text File or All Files from the Files of Type drop-down list, select the
file's coordinate and datum from the applicable drop-down lists.
OR
If you selected GPS Log File format, select how you want the file to display on the
map from the Import As drop-down list.
7. Select the file and then click Open. The draw objects in the imported file display. A
new draw file is automatically created for the imported file.
8. Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area.
Notes
You can import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information is
formatted correctly.
•
The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End.
•
The second line must be a coordinate.
•
The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs. A line is defined by
direction and length.
152
Using the Draw Tools
•
A curve is defined by the word curve, followed by a letter representing the side of
the arc to put the radius. This is followed by the length of the radius and the length
of the arc. The arc is completed with a bearing from the start to finish point.
•
For more information, see Sample Survey File.
If you import
That results from this
this type of
source...
The following is imported...
file...
Address Book
Address Book File
(.txt, .csv)
Draw objects display with the current
symbol and style selections.
Notes
Files must be tab or comma-delimited.
Format: name, address, city, state, ZIP
Code, phone.
Files must be less than 250 records long.
Text File (.txt)
Lat/Lon Text File
Draw objects display with the current
symbol and line style selections.
GPS Log File
Any DeLorme product
Line or waypoint object displays with the
(.gpl)
that supports GPS
current line preferences.
tracking
GPX File (.gpx)
DeLorme product or
May contain one or more routes, tracks,
third-party application
or waypoints, as well as comments.
Notes
When you import a GPX file, all the
waypoints, tracks, comments, and
routes found in the file are imported at
the same time.
When you download a GPX file from
Geocaching.com, the hints on the
website are added to the Comments
column of the file. When you export the
file to an Earthmate PN-Series GPS
153
Topo USA User Guide
device, the comments are included.
Location File
Waypoint file from
Coordinate information, name, and URL
(.loc)
Geocaching.com
link.
POI
POI Factory or Garmin
Draw objects display with the current
Factory/Garmin
File
symbol and style selections.
Magellan Track Log
Latitude, longitude, elevation, name and
CSV File (.csv)
Magellan Track
File (.log)
date/time (if specified).
Magellan Waypoint File
Magellan
Latitude, longitude, elevation, name,
comment, and symbol are imported.
Waypoint File
(.upt)
Draw Layer Files
Draw File (.an2)
Draw objects display with the current
1999-2009 Draw File
symbol and line style selections.
(.an1)
Topo USA 2.0 (.ano)
MapDocs (.sa7,

.sa8, .sa9, .mn5,
.mn6, .mn7)

Street Atlas USA
Draw objects display with the current
7.0, 8.0, and 9.0.
symbol and line style selections.
AAA Map'n'Go 5.0,
6, and 7.0
Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File
These are the formatting conventions, with examples, for creating a text file to import as a
draw file.
Draw
Format
Example
BEGIN LINE
BEGIN LINE
LAT, LON
43.807801,-70.164440
Object
Line
154
Using the Draw Tools
LAT, LON
43.807629,-70.163801
LAT, LON
43.807211,-70.162746
END
43.806707,-70.163400
43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END
Spline
BEGIN SPLINE
BEGIN SPLINE
LAT, LON
43.807801,-70.164440
LAT, LON
43.807629,-70.163801
LAT, LON
43.807211,-70.162746
LAT, LON
43.806707,-70.163400
END
43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END
Arc
BEGIN ARC
BEGIN ARC
LAT, LON
43.807801,-70.164440
LAT, LON
43.807704,-70.162775
LAT, LON
43.807211,-70.162746
LAT, LON
43.807430,-70.163644
END
END
Polygon
BEGIN POLY
BEGIN POLY
Rectangle
LAT, LON
43.808692,-70.165392
LAT, LON
43.808692,-70.162493
LAT, LON
43.806621,-70.162493
LAT, LON
43.806621,-70.165392
END
43.808692,-70.165392
END
155
Topo USA User Guide
Circle
Symbol
MapNote
Text Label
BEGIN CIRCLE
BEGIN CIRCLE
LAT, LON, Radius
43.807662,-70.163935,0.114611
END
END
BEGIN SYMBOL
BEGIN SYMBOL
LAT, LON, Name, Symbol
43.807662,-70.163935,DeLorme, Blue
Name
Pin
END
END
BEGIN NOTE
BEGIN NOTE
LAT, LON, Text
43.807662,-70.163935,DeLorme
END
END
BEGIN TEXT
BEGIN TEXT
LAT, LON, Text
43.807662,-70.163935,DeLorme
END
END
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File
Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads and
highways, railroads, power lines, pipelines, rivers or streams, Zip Code boundaries, and grid
lines.
To Copy a Map Line
Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file.
1. Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level.
OR
Open the project with the map view you want.
2. Right-click the object on the map you want to bring into the draw file, point to
Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and then click the object in the list.
The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections.
Saving a Track as a GPS Log
You can save any track as a GPS log with the right-click feature.
To Save a Track as a GPS Log
156
Using the Draw Tools
Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log.
1. Place a track on the map.
2. Right-click the track, point to Manage Draw, and then click Save as GPS Log File.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default location is
C:\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.
The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created.
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File
Once you create a draw file (draw, road, trail, waypoint, or track layer), you can view the
contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab.
To View the Contents of a Draw File
Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw, road, trail, waypoint, or track file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
•
Draw layer contents include the draw object label (name), comments about
the draw object, the URL assigned when the draw object was added to the
map, the date and time the object was last modified, and the draw object
type (symbol, line, polygon, circle, etc.).
•
Road layer contents include the routable road name, comments about the
routable road, the URL assigned when the routable road was added to the
map, the date and time the routable road was last modified, and the length of
the road (in the measurement chosen in the Display settings).
•
Trail layer contents include the routable trail name, comments about the
routable trail, the URL assigned when the routable trail was added to the
157
Topo USA User Guide
map, the date and time the routable trail was last modified, and the length of
the trail (in the measurement chosen in the Display settings).
•
Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint, the URL
assigned when the waypoint was added to the map, the date and time the
waypoint was last modified, the coordinates of the waypoint, the elevation of
the waypoint, and the symbol name.
•
Track layer contents include comments about the track, the URL assigned
when the track was added to the map, the date and time the track was last
modified, the start and finish time of the track, the total time of the track, the
distance of the track (in the measurement chosen in the Display settings),
and the number of readings that the track includes.
5. Optional. Double-click a draw object in the table to center the map on its location.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Go To.
6. Optional. To sort the columns of data in the table in ascending order, click the
column header. Click the column header again to sort in descending order.
7. Optional. To modify a draw object's name, comment, or URL, in the table, click the
draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not double-click).
Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type the
new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field, press CTRL+ENTER on your
keyboard.
8. Optional. To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box, right click the file in the
draw file editing area and click Details.
9. Optional. To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL, right-click
the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser.
10. Optional. To delete a draw object, click the draw object in the table and click the
Delete button.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
158
Using the Draw Tools
11. Optional. Click Less to return the tab height to its default height.
Note To edit the Comments field, click once in the cell, type your text in the box, and then
press ENTER on your keyboard. When you hover your cursor over a comment, the entire
comment displays as a ToolTip.
Copying a Draw File
You can copy the contents of an existing file and save it as a different file type (for example,
convert a road layer to a draw layer).
To Copy a Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click to select the file that you want to copy.
4. Click Copy To and select Road, Trail, Waypoint, or Track. A new file is created
and inserted into the table.
Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right-click feature on the map. For
more information, see Changing Draw Object Types.
Changing Draw Object Types
When you add a draw object to the map, a draw file is automatically created that includes
that object. The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was created.
Draw Object Type
Draw File
Type
Routable Road
Road Layer
Routable Trail
Trail Layer
Waypoint
Waypoint
Layer
Track
Track
Layer
Area Object (Polygon, Circle,
Draw Layer
Rectangle)
159
Topo USA User Guide
Point Object (MapNote, Text
Label, Symbol, Image)
Line Object (Line, Arc, Spline)
You can right-click a draw object on the map and change it to a road, track, trail, waypoint,
or draw layer, depending on the type of draw object you selected. When the draw file type
is changed, the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made and switched to the new
draw file type, leaving you with two files: the original draw file and the copied draw file,
which has a new draw file type.
To Change a Draw Object
Use the following steps to change a draw object type.
1. Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map.
2. To change a routable trail, track, or line to a road layer, right-click the object on the
map, point to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Road Layer.
OR
To change a routable road or routable trail to a track layer, right-click the object on
the map, point to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Track Layer.
OR
To change a routable road, track, or line to a trail layer, right-click the object, point
to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Trail Layer.
OR
To change a routable road, routable trail, waypoint, or track to a draw layer, rightclick the object on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw
Object, and then click the object to copy to.
OR
To create a copy of an existing area object, point object, or line object, right-click the
object on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and
then click the object to copy to.
OR
To change a track to a GPS log, right-click the track on the map, point to Manage
Draw, and click Copy Track to GPS Log.
OR
160
Using the Draw Tools
To change a symbol to a waypoint, right-click the symbol on the map, point to
Manage Draw, and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint.
Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab. For more
information, see Copying a Draw File.
Renaming a Draw File
Once you create a draw file, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
To Rename a Draw File
Use the following steps to rename a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Right-click the draw file and click Rename.
The file name area activates.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
The file name area activates.
4. Type the new file name in the cell and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object
Once you have placed a routable road, trail, line, arc, or spline on the map, you can use the
right-click feature to create a direct route using the points in that line object.
To Create a Route from a Routable Road, Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline
Use the following steps to create a direct route from a road, trail, line, arc, or spline.
1. Place a routable road, trail, line, arc, or spline on the map.
2. Right-click the line object on the map and click Create Route from Line.
The original line object is retained in its draw file and a new direct route is created.
3. To view information about the route, click the Route tab and then click the
Directions subtab.
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another
You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right-click feature in the
draw file list. Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while placing a copy of
161
Topo USA User Guide
it in a selected draw file. If you want to move a draw object to another draw file, see Moving
a Draw Object to a Different Draw File.
To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file, point to Copy
To, and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to.
The draw object remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected draw
file.
Note To select multiple draw objects in the file list, press and hold the CTRL key
and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files, press and hold the SHIFT
key and click the first and last file.
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right-click feature in the draw
file list. In order to move a draw object to another draw file, a secondary, compatible draw
file must exist.
Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file. If you do not want to remove it,
but copy it to another draw file, see Copying a Draw Object from One Draw File to Another.
To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to move a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.
162
Using the Draw Tools
4. Click More. The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The
information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object you want to move, point to Move To, and then click the
draw file you want to copy the object to—all compatible draw files display in the
Move To list.
The draw object is moved to the new destination.
Note To select multiple draw objects in the file list, press and hold the CTRL key
and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files, press and hold the SHIFT
key and click the first and last file.
Using Draw Objects
Copying and Placing Draw Objects
You can copy any draw object you place on the map.
To Copy Draw Objects
Use the following steps to copy draw objects.
1. Open the project that contains the draw object you want to copy.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. To copy a single draw object, click the Select tool
and then click the draw object
on the map. A box displays around the active object.
OR
To copy multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
and then drag a box over
the draw objects you want to copy.
4. To copy, press the CTRL+C keys on your keyboard.
5. To paste, press CTRL+V on your keyboard. The newly copied object is placed directly
on top of the original (copied) object.
6. To move the copied object, use the table below.
If the draw object is a...
Then...
Routable Road, Routable
Press and hold the SHIFT
Trail, Track, Line, Arc,
key on your keyboard and
Spline, Polygon, Rectangle,
drag the object to the
Circle, or MapNote
new location.
163
Topo USA User Guide
Symbol or Text
Drag the object to the
new location.
Tips
•
To undo the move of the pasted draw object, click the Undo button
to undo the
last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button
•
.
If you undo the first move of the pasted object, the object is placed back on top of
the original (copied) object.
•
To copy and move a single object, select the draw object you want to copy, press the
CTRL key on your keyboard, and drag the draw object to the new location.
•
If the item you copied does not successfully paste, it may be because you clicked out
of the map display. To focus the cursor back on the map, click inside the map
display. Then, try pasting again.
Moving Draw Objects
You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one location
to another.
To Move Draw Objects
Use the following steps to move draw objects.
1. Open the project that contains the object you want to move.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click the Select tool
and click the draw object you want to move. A box displays
around the active object.
You can move draw objects in different ways:
If the object is a(n)...
Then...
Routable Road, Routable Trail,
Press and hold the SHIFT key on your
Track, Line, Arc, Spline,
keyboard and drag the object to the new
Polygon, Rectangle, or Circle
location.
OR
Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to
move the object up, down, right, or left.
164
Using the Draw Tools
Symbol or Text
Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to
move the object up, down, right, or left.
OR
Drag it to the new location.
MapNote
To move the entire MapNote, press and
hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and
drag the object to the new location, or
position your cursor between the MapNote
text and the anchor and drag the entire
MapNote to the desired location.
OR
To move the MapNote's anchor, drag the
MapNote's anchor to the new location.
OR
To move the MapNote's text, drag the
MapNote's text to the desired location.
Tip To undo a draw object move, click the Undo button
to undo the last action.
If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button
.
Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new coordinate or
distance and bearing/angle number within the corresponding text boxes.
•
Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles, symbols, text, and
MapNotes. The whole object moves to the entered location. If you change the
distance and bearing numbers, the object moves in relationship to the object's
last location.
•
Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points (small red
circles) in line segments in routable roads, trails, lines, splines, polygons,
rectangles, and arcs. If you change the distance and bearing numbers of the
individual points (not recommended for rectangles), the end point's distance
and bearing/angle change in relationship to the start point of the segment.
Renaming a Draw Object
Once you create a draw object, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
165
Topo USA User Guide
To Rename a Draw Object in the File List
Use the following steps to rename a draw object in the file list.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. Any draw file with a selected check
box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object and select Rename.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
6. The file name area activates. Type the file name and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
To Rename a Draw Object on the Map
Use the following steps to rename a draw object on the map.
1. Open the project that contains the draw object you want to rename.
2. Right-click the waypoint, point to Manage Draw and click Edit Draw Object Text.
The waypoint text box opens.
Note If you have more than one waypoint close together, you may have to select
from a list.
OR
Click the Select tool
, click the waypoint, and click the waypoint again (do not
double-click). The waypoint text box opens.
3. Type the new name in the box and press ENTER on your keyboard OR click away
from the box.
Deleting Draw Objects
Once you place a draw object on a draw file, you can delete the object. You can also delete
multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file.
166
Using the Draw Tools
To Delete One Draw Object
Use the following steps to delete a draw object.
1. Open the existing project that contains the draw object you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click the Select tool
and then click the draw object on the map to select it. A
box displays around the selected object.
4. Click Delete in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the object and then select Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted, click the Undo button
to undo the
last action. You can undo approximately 200 events in a single project.
Note You can also delete a draw object using the right-click feature in the draw file list.
Click the File button in the Draw tab, click to select the Draw File that contains the object
you want to delete, click More, right-click the object, and then click Delete. To select
multiple draw objects in the file list, press and hold the CTRL key and click each file OR to
select multiple sequential files, press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last file.
To Delete Multiple Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete several draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
, click the first draw object
on the map to select it, and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard
while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete. A box displays around
each selected object.
OR
To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
, drag a box over the draw
objects you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
167
Topo USA User Guide
OR
Right-click the object and then click Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from the
current file.
•
If you click Yes, all selected draw objects in the file are deleted. You cannot
undo this action.
•
If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.
To Delete All Draw Objects
To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file, click the Draw tab and, click a draw
object button that represents the draw file you want to clear (for example, if you want to
clear a RoadLayer, click the Routable Roads tool
) and then click Clear All. A message
box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from the current file.
•
If you click Yes, all draw objects in the file are cleared. You cannot undo this
action.
•
If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.
Snapping Draw Objects
You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object.
You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object.
To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object
Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
and then click the draw object on the map.
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small, magenta
squares.
3. Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object.
It displays as a red or green circle.
4. Drag the point to:
168
•
Any other shape point within a line, spline, polygon, arc, or rectangle.
•
The center point of a circle.
•
The anchor of a symbol.
Using the Draw Tools
•
The base point of a text label.
•
The text box anchor point of a MapNote.
When you drag your shape point over a point on the draw object, a yellow diamond
defines the snap point
. Release the point you dragged when the snap point
displays. The active draw object is then snapped to the other object's point
coordinate.
Tip To undo a draw object snap, click Undo to undo the last action. If you decide not to
undo the last action, click Redo.
Notes
•
Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc.
•
To turn the snapping feature off, press the ALT key on the keyboard while dragging
the draw object.
To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object
Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
and then click the arc on the map.
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small, magenta
squares.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard, drag the center point of the arc line
over a point on the draw object until the snap point displays.
4. Release the arc. It is snapped to the other object's point coordinate.
Adding Points to Draw Objects
You can add points to routable road, trail, line, spline, and polygon draw objects to change
the shape of the object.
To Add Points to Draw Objects
Use the following steps to add points to routable roads, trails, lines, splines, and polygons.
1. In the Draw tab, click the Select tool
, and then click the draw object you want
to edit.
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the draw
objects display as small, magenta squares.
169
Topo USA User Guide
2. Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag.
A new point is created, as well as a new line segment within the object. The new
segment displays with its first and last end points, as well as a text box indicating
the new point's bearing or angle, length of the new segment (leg), and total object's
length on the map.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button
to undo
the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button
.
Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
You can delete points from routable road, routable trail, track, line, spline, and polygon
draw objects to change the shape of the object.
To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
and click the draw object you want to edit.
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the linear
objects display as small, magenta squares.
3. Select the shape point.
The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line
segment it is associated with.
4. Click Delete in the Draw display area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
The point is deleted, as well as the line segment within the draw object that was
associated with that point.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button
the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button
to undo
.
Labeling a Draw Object
You can label any draw object. Once you label a draw object, you can search for it using the
QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in any of the routing
fields in the Route tab.
To Label a Draw Object
170
Using the Draw Tools
See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects.
For this Draw Object...
Use this labeling procedure...
Routable Roads
Type the name of the street/trail in the text box available in
Routable Trails
the Draw dialog area.
Arcs
1. Place the object on the map.
Circles
2. Using the Select tool
Lines
, click the draw object once.
A gray box displays around the draw object.
Polygons
3. Click the draw object again. A text box displays.
Rectangles
4. Type the label name in the text box and then press the
Splines
ENTER key on your keyboard.
Tracks
Waypoints
Images
MapNotes
Symbols
Text Labels
Waypoints
1. Place the object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
2. Type the label for your draw object in the Label section
of the text box.
Note When viewing a hyperlinked draw object on the map,
the object displays as an active hyperlink. If you want to
click the object without opening the hyperlink, press the
CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the draw object.
Routable Roads, Trails, Tracks, Lines, Arcs , and Splines
Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map
The Routable Road and Routable Trail tools allow you to add a new road or trail to a draw
layer in the current project. You can then incorporate any new roads or trails you add to a
route when you create a route. You must be at data zoom level 11-0 or greater when
adding roads or trails with the Routable Road tool or Routable Trail tool.
To Draw Routable Roads or Trails
Use the following steps to add routable roads/trails to a road layer.
1. Click the Draw tab.
171
Topo USA User Guide
2. Click and hold the Routable Road/Routable Trail tool
and select the tool
you want.
3. Type the name of the road or trail you want to add in the Road/Trail Name text
box.
Name each routable road/trail you add so you can locate it using the find feature.
4. Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads and trails to display the yellow diamond
symbol . The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point
for your new road will connect (connection point).
Notes
•
The new road must connect to an existing non-limited access road for routing
to occur on the new road.
•
Each time you intersect an existing road or trail, hover the mouse over the
road/trail to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a
connection point before continuing to draw. If you draw the line over the
road/trail without creating a connection point, routing cannot occur along the
intersection.
5. Once you locate the connection point for your new road or trail, click the map to
place the first point. Click point-to-point or drag to add the new road/trail to the
draw layer.
The following information is available as you add each point in your road or trail:
•
The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes.
•
The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
6. To finish the line draw for the new road or trail, enter the last point on the map
screen and click Done.
The new road or trail displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road/Trail
Name text box.
You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or
double-clicking while entering the last point of the line.
Drawing a Line, Arc, or Spline on the Map
You can add lines, arcs, and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style, color, width,
and display them with map line features.
172
Using the Draw Tools
•
Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines. You can draw lines
with varied line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect actual map
line types.
•
Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file. You can draw arcs with varied
line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect actual map line types.
Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map. The first and
second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base. The
third point, placed between the first two, determines the radius of the arc and fixes
the arc in place.
•
Use splines to add trails or any other map features that contains curves. You can
draw splines with varied line colors, weights, and styles, including lines that reflect
actual map line types.
Note As you draw a spline, points are entered in much the same way as those
entered when creating a line. The difference between a line and a spline is that when
you enter each point, the line segment between the points curves instead of staying
straight.
To Draw a Line, Arc, or Spline
Use the following steps to draw a line/arc/spline.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool
and select the tool you want.
3. Select a line/arc/spline style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a line/arc/spline
color.
5. If available, select a line/arc/spline width from the Width drop-down list.
6. If available, select the Highlight check box to make your line/arc/spline appear
translucent on the map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points
on the map as you draw the line/arc/spline.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing
or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the line/arc/spline on the
map. Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box
is selected.
173
Topo USA User Guide
8. To draw a line or spline, click the map to designate the start and end points of each
line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
OR
To draw an arc, click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc.
•
The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the
right of the line options.
•
The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
9. To finish the line/arc/spline, click the last point on the map screen and then click
Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the line/arc/spline.
Drawing a Track on the Map
You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style, color, width, and display them
with map line features.
To Draw a Track
Use the following steps to draw a track.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool
and select the Track tool
.
3. Select a track style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a track color.
5. Select a track width from the Width drop-down list.
6. Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points
on the map as you draw the track.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing
or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the track on the map. Labels
display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected.
174
Using the Draw Tools
8. Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
•
The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the
right of the line options.
•
The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
9. To finish the track, click the last point on the map screen and then click Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the track.
Tip To get information about a track, right-click it on the map and click Info. The Info tab
opens with information about the track.
Tutorial: Convert Tracks into Trails
You can convert a track to a trail so you can use it when calculating trail routes for a GPS
device.
Step 1—Open the track file in the Draw tab
The track is saved in a draw file. To view the track, click the File button in the Draw tab and
double-click the track name you want to convert.
Step 2—Convert the track to a trail
To convert the track to a trail, select the track in the Draw File list, click the Copy To
button, and then click Trail. The track is converted to a trail.
Step 3—Join broken trail lines
175
Topo USA User Guide
The large red circle indicates a break in the user trail. The small red circle indicates a break
between the user trail and the existing trail.
To ensure that the trail is routable, you must join the trail lines and then snap them to
existing trails/roads.
1. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
2. Click the Select tool
in the Draw tab, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard,
and then click both of the trail segments. Boxes display around each segment.
3. Right-click one of the segments, point to Manage Draw, and then click Join Lines.
Step 4—Snap the new trail to an existing trail
To snap the new trail to an existing road/trail:
1. Click the Select tool and then click the trail on the map.
2. Click the pink end point of your trail that is closest to the existing road/trail (it will
display as a red circle) and drag it to the existing road/trail. A yellow diamond
defines the snap point.
176
Using the Draw Tools
3. Release the point when the snap point displays.
The new trail is now snapped to the existing road/trail and can be used when
creating a route.
Editing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline
Once you create a line object (routable road, routable trail, line, arc, or spline) you can edit
(including reshaping or changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
To Edit a Line Object
Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road/trail, line, arc, or spline.
1. Open the project containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the line object you want to edit is not active, click File and activate the draw file in
the file list. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool
and then click the line object you want to edit.
•
A box displays around the selected line.
•
The shape points used to create the line object display as small, magenta
squares.
5. Perform any of the following edits to the line object:
•
To edit any label on the line object, select it twice, then type the label in the
text box that displays next to the line object.
OR
Select the line object and edit its label.
•
Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object:
•
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line
segment.
•
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line
segment.
•
Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit
the numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop-down
arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in
the Distance and Bearing/Angle option.
177
Topo USA User Guide
6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Editing a Track
Once you download a track from a GPS receiver, you can edit (including reshaping or
changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
To Edit a Track
Use the following steps to edit a track.
1. Open the project containing the draw file with the track you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and select the
draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool
and click the track you want to edit.
•
A box displays around the selected track.
•
The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta squares.
5. Change any of the track style, color, or weight options of the existing track.
•
To edit any label on a track, click the Select tool, select the line twice, then
type the label in the text box that displays next to the track.
•
Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line:
•
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track
segment.
•
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track
segment.
•
Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit
their numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
178
Using the Draw Tools
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Placing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or
Spline at a Specific Location
You can place any line object (routable road, routable trail, line, arc, or spline) at a specific
coordinate location.
To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a routable road or trail, click and hold the Routable Road/Routable Trail
tool
and select the tool you want.
OR
To place a line/arc/spline, click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool
and
select the tool you want. Then, select the line, style, width (if available), and color
for your line/arc/spline.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle option in
conjunction with the Coordinate option, and enter the appropriate coordinates or
numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box.
Note If you are placing an arc, enter new numbers into the Distance and
Bearing/Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only. When the central
shape point of the arc is selected, the text options change from Distance and
Bearing/Angle to Radius and Direction. Enter the appropriate radius number and
direction to change the radius for this point.
4. Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point.
The line object displays on the map at those coordinates, distance, and bearing or
angle.
OR
After placing the first point coordinate, move your pointer to the map screen and
place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen.
5. To place additional points, lines, or other draw objects on the map in reference to the
first line, enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and
click Apply.
179
Topo USA User Guide
Joining and Breaking Linear Objects
You can join two or more routable roads/trails, tracks, lines, arcs, or splines into a single
entity. You can also break routable roads/trails, tracks, lines, or splines. You cannot break
arcs.
To Join
Use the following steps to join linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
, press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and select
any lines, arcs, or splines you want to join.
OR
Click the Select tool
and drag a box around the linear objects you want to join.
Note When joining the preceding types of line objects, you can mix and match lines,
arcs, and splines. The result is always a line. However, when you join multiple
splines, the resulting joined object is a spline.
3. Right-click, point to Manage Draw, and then click Join Lines.
OR
Join the lines by pressing CTRL+J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned
for the joining function.
The selected lines are joined.
Note Any other objects selected during the multi-select process are ignored.
To Break
Use the following steps to break linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
and select the line object you want to break.
•
A box displays around the active line.
•
The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta squares.
3. Click the shape point where you want to break the line, right-click, point to Manage
Draw, and then click Break Line.
The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit each
line separately.
Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively. If you pan the
180
Using the Draw Tools
map, use another tab, and so on between steps, you may need to repeat the steps
again to break your linear object.
Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons
Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can add area objects (circles, rectangles, and polygons) to a draw file in your current
project. Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects.
•
Use circles to designate circular map features.
•
Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map feature.
•
Use polygons to designate water bodies, land boundaries, or any other irregular
map feature.
Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or changing
line color or weight), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
Note The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the circle, rectangle, and
polygon tools in the Draw tab. When you draw an area object on the map, the area displays
next to the object on the map. If you click off of the object, you can view the area again by
clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map.
To Draw a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to add circles, rectangles, or polygons to the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
to view its hidden
options. Select the tool you want.
3. From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to the area object.
4. Click the Fill Color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select the color
for your fill style.
5. Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop-down list.
6. Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area object.
7. Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop-down list.
8. Select the Show Measurement check box to display area (and radius information
for circles) on the map as you draw the object.
9. To draw a circle, click the location for the circle's center on the map and drag away
from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as soon as you achieve the radius
181
Topo USA User Guide
you want. The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle's center display in
the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area.
OR
To draw a rectangle, click the location for the rectangle's upper-left corner on the
map and drag away from the corner to set the width, height, and area for the
rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size you want. The coordinates of the
upper-left corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill
options. The distance and bearing/angle of the final corner point from the first corner
point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options.
OR
To draw a polygon, click the map to enter each point of the polygon. The
coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the
fill options. The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes. Labels display when end points are clicked if
the Show Measurement check box is selected.
10. Click the Select tool
and then click the area object on the map.
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
11. Click the object again. A text box displays. Type the label in the text box and press
the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Editing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or changing
line color or weight), copy, move, or delete at any time.
To Edit a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to edit an area draw object.
1. Open the project containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and select the
draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done. The Draw dialog area
displays.
4. Click the Select tool
and then click the object on the map.
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
OR
182
Using the Draw Tools
To edit multiple objects, click the Select tool
and then drag a box around the
objects that you want to edit.
5. Change the object's fill, outline, and/or width option.
OR
If you selected a single circle, drag one of the magenta squares around the circle to
change the circle's size. The center of the circle remains in its original location.
OR
If you selected a single rectangle, click one of the corner points of the rectangle and
drag to change its width, height, and area on the map.
OR
If you selected a single polygon, click one of the shape points of the polygon and
drag to change its bearing or angle, the leg length, and polygon area on the map.
Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active polygon, a small
green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment and a small red
circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment. Select the
Coordinate option or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit their
numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop-down arrow
next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and
Bearing/Angle option. You can also delete points and line segments from or add
points to a polygon.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Placing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can place any area object (circle, rectangle, or polygon) at a specific coordinate
location.
To Place an Area Object on the Map
Use the following steps to place a circle, rectangle, or polygon on the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
and select the tool
you want.
183
Topo USA User Guide
3. Select the circle fill, outline, and/or width options.
4. To place a circle on the map, enter the coordinates for the circle's center into the
corresponding text boxes. Then, enter the radius for the circle into the radius text
box.
OR
To place a rectangle on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the Distance
and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option. Enter the
appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle's upper-left corner point into
the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box.
OR
To place a polygon on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the Distance
and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option, and enter
the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon point into the
corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box.
5. Click Apply.
Note If you are placing a polygon on the map, repeat the procedure for the other
points.
Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and Images
Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or
Image to the Map
You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current project Point objects consist of
one anchor point attached to a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, image, or text label. The anchor
point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of
the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed.
•
Use the Waypoint tool to label waypoints on a map. You can sync waypoints with a
GPS device.
•
Use the Symbol tool to identify certain areas on the map such as houses,
monuments, or points of interest.
•
Use the MapNote tool to point to and label a specific area on the map. See Map
Notes for more information.
•
Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map.
•
Use the Image tool to add, edit, or place .bmp, .jpg, and .gif images on the map.
To Add a Point Object to the Map
184
Using the Draw Tools
•
Add a MapNote, text label, or symbol
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text/Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
the tool you want. Then, select the font, style, size, and color for your point
object's label from the text style options.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
and browse to the document you
want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and click Open.
The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Notes
These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes. To show/delete Route MapNotes,
see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
You can also add a MapNote by right-clicking the map on the point you want to label,
pointing to Add MapNote, and then selecting a MapNote option.
•
Add a waypoint
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the Tracks/Waypoints tool and select Waypoint
. Then,
select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options. You can also select a
different font, style, size, and color for the waypoint name.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
and browse to the document you
want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and click Open.
The address appears in the URL field.
185
Topo USA User Guide
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
•
Add an image
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
Image
. Under Images, select an existing image, or click Add, browse to
an image, and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection.
Note To delete an image from the Images selection, select the image and
then click Delete.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
and browse to the document you
want to hyperlink your point object to. The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find
tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish, Stop, or Via text boxes when creating
a route in the Route tab.
Editing a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or
Image
Once you add a point object to a draw file, you can edit (name only), copy, move, or delete
it at any time. You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by dragging a box
around the objects you want to edit. Any changes are made to all of the point objects
included in the box.
To Edit a Point Object
Use the following steps to edit a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, text label, or image.
186
Using the Draw Tools
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
and then click the point object on the map twice.
3. Type a new name or phrase in the Label field, change the name's font, style, size, or
color; select a new symbol; or click the Hyperlink button to change the URL
address.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point object's
active area when you are finished.
Placing a Waypoint, Symbol, Text Label, or Image at a
Specific Location
You can place any point object (waypoint, symbol, text label, or image) at a specific
coordinate location.
To Place a Point Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place a waypoint, symbol, text label, or image at a specific
coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a waypoint, click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool
Waypoint tool
and select the
. Select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options. You can
also select a different font, style, size and color for the waypoint name.
OR
To place a symbol, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image
tool
and select the Symbol tool
. Select the symbol from the
Symbol Selection list. You can also select a different font, style, size and color for
the symbol name.
OR
To place a text label, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool
and select the Text Label tool
. Select the font, style, size, and color from the
text style options. A sample of how your text display appears to the left of the
options.
OR
To place an image, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Image tool
. Under Images, select an
187
Topo USA User Guide
existing image or click Add, browse to an image, and click Open to add a new image
to your Images selection.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle option in
conjunction with the Coordinate option, and type the appropriate coordinates or
numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box.
4. Click Apply. The point object displays on the map at those coordinates, distance,
and bearing or angle.
5. If you are placing a text label, enter the text and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard or click the map outside of the text label active area when you are finished.
Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes
You can add your own MapNotes to a map. MapNotes have a white background that make
them highly visible on the map. They can contain multiple lines of text and can be moved
off of the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points. You can use
MapNotes for directions or explanations.
Notes
•
This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw MapNotes. To
show/delete Route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
•
When you use right-click functionality to add a MapNote, it is light blue unless it is a
blank MapNote.
•
You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch function in
the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish, Stop, or Via text
boxes when creating a route in the Route tab.
To Move a MapNote
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
.
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
The MapNote is enclosed with a box.
4. You can:
•
Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote.
•
Drag the text box to a new location, leaving the anchor point in the same
location on the map.
188
Using the Draw Tools
•
Drag the anchor point to a new location, leaving the text box in the same
location on the map.
To Delete a MapNote
Use the following steps to delete a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool
.
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
Custom Symbols
Custom Symbols Overview
DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols, which you can edit and add to
maps within DeLorme mapping programs. The symbols created are 24 x 24 pixels. New and
edited symbols are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) and can contain up to 250 symbols.
Symbol set files are located at C:\DeLorme Docs\Symbols.
The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box
The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for your
DeLorme mapping program. Click an area on the diagram below to view information on the
various parts of the dialog box.
Tip To close the pop-up information box that displays when you click the diagram, click
outside the image or click another part of the image.
189
Topo USA User Guide
Creating a New Symbol
With DeLorme XSym you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set (.dim) file.
You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in
the DeLorme mapping program.
To Create a New Symbol
Use the following steps to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to from the
drop-down list OR select New to create a new symbol set.
4. Under Symbols, click Edit to display the DeLorme XSym dialog box.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and Anchor to
create the new symbol.
190
Using the Draw Tools
•
To undo the last action, click the Undo button
•
To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
•
See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into XSym,
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym.
GPS Device Custom Symbols
You can use DeLorme XSym to create custom symbol sets for use with your DeLorme PNSeries GPS device or a compatible third-party GPS device.
If you are assigning waypoint IDs to symbols for a third-party device, use the Waypoint ID
text box (shaded green) to make the assignment. If you are assigning symbols to use with
a PN-Series GPS, click the button in the GPS area (shaded orange). The image on the
button changes based on the symbol you have selected.
PN-Series Devices
You can create a custom symbol set and assign the symbols to the symbols on your PNSeries GPS.
To Assign Symbols to Symbols on a PN-Series GPS
1. Click the Draw tab.
191
Topo USA User Guide
2. Click and hold the Waypoint/Track tool
the Waypoint tool
to view its hidden options. Select
.
3. Create a new symbol set.
4. Create a symbol.
5. Under GPS, click the symbol button (the image on the button varies) to open the
PN-Series symbol set.
6. Click the PN-Series symbol to which you want to map your symbol.
7. Click OK.
Third-Party GPS Devices
You can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on your thirdparty GPS device. By creating this custom symbol set, the waypoints you create display the
same in both the mapping application and on your third-party GPS device, no matter where
they originated.
Third-party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number, which is
assigned by the device's manufacturer. To successfully view third-party GPS waypoint
symbols in the mapping application, you must assign the proper waypoint identification
number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set.
Important To create a custom symbol set of your third-party GPS device's waypoint
symbols, you must contact the device's manufacturer to obtain the graphic files and the
waypoint ID number associated with each symbol.
To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Waypoint/Track tool
the Waypoint tool
to view its hidden options. Select
.
3. Create a new symbol set.
4. Paste the third-party GPS device's waypoint symbol into XSym.
5. Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent.
6. Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID text
box.
192
Using the Draw Tools
7. For each additional symbol, click New and then repeat steps 4–7.
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
Waypoint ID numbers vary by manufacturer and model.
•
If you import multiple waypoints from a third-party GPS device without assigning a
waypoint ID to each first, all of the waypoints display in the mapping application with a
single default symbol.
•
If you do not know the identification number for a third-party GPS device's waypoint,
import the waypoint file into the mapping application. Then, use one of the two
methods below to learn the waypoint ID:
o
Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint's ID number in
XSym.
o
Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map.
The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab.
Editing a Symbol
With DeLorme XSym, you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set (.dim) file and save
the change or save it as a new symbol to be added to another symbol set. You can assign a
new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme
mapping program.
To Edit a Symbol
Use the following steps to edit a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit. The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default symbol
set or from another symbol set you have created. The symbol displays in the Symbol
Editing Grid.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
193
Topo USA User Guide
•
To undo the last action, click the Undo button
•
To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Note
•
As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
•
See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into XSym,
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
Finding a Custom Symbol
The symbol name you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you attach to
the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool. You can use the symbol name to help
locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map using the Advanced feature
under the Find tab.
To Find a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name.
1. Click the Find tab and then click Advanced.
2. Select Category from the Find drop-down list
3. Select the applicable option from the Within drop-down list.
4. Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box.
5. Click Search.
6. Click OK.
The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box.
The Symbol Name displays in the Map Feature Type column just before the symbol's
feature type (draw object).
7. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on
the map.
194
Using the Draw Tools
The map view centers on the item. If you assigned a name for the symbol under the
Draw tab, a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location.
If you did not assign a name for the symbol, a MapTag displays the Symbol Name at
the symbol location.
Notes
•
If you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym, you can locate it with the
generic keyword of "symbol" or by the name or phrase given the symbol in the Draw
tab. For more information, see Finding a Symbol by its Name.
•
If you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the symbol
on the map, the Symbol Name displays in the demographic information area when
you right-click the symbol and select Info.
Importing a Bitmap
You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol, but any bitmap you
import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less. You can assign a new category name for the symbol
to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Import a Bitmap
Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
5. Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box. Browse to the location of
the bitmap and click Open.
The imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important Notes
below.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
To undo the last action, click the Undo button
•
•
To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.
195
Topo USA User Guide
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
•
If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
•
As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Copying and Pasting
You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols to create new symbols or
edit existing ones.
To Copy and Paste in XSym
Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an existing symbol
or to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, select a symbol from the symbol selection.
6. In the Draw Tool Box, click the Select tool.
7. Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol, and then
click the Copy button
196
under Edit Symbol.
Using the Draw Tools
8. Click the Paste button
under Edit Symbol. The copied image is pasted into the
current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid. Drag the pasted piece into the place you
want it within the current symbol.
OR
To create a new symbol with the copied image, click New under Symbols in Set to
clear the Symbol Editing Grid, and then click the Paste button to add the pasted
image into the grid.
Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the
Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program. To assign a symbol name to the current
symbol, type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
9. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
To undo an action, click the Undo button
•
To repeat an action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym
You can copy a bitmap or part of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into
DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Ideally, the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in
size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab
in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Paste a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Open a bitmap in another image editing program, and select the bitmap or a part of
the bitmap you want to copy. Press CTRL+C on your keyboard to copy the selection
to the clipboard.
197
Topo USA User Guide
7. Click the Paste button
under Edit Symbol.
The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid. See
important Notes below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
•
To undo the last action, click the Undo button
under Edit Symbol.
•
To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
•
If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
•
As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Using drag to bring in an
image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym. Ideally, the new bitmap should be 24 x
24 pixels in size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under
the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Drag a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
198
Using the Draw Tools
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Browse your computer to locate the bitmap (.bmp) file.
7. Drag the file into XSym.
The bitmap image displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important Notes below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
•
To undo the last action, click the Undo button
•
To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.
9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•
If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
•
If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
•
As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Removing a Symbol
You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set you
have created.
To Remove a Symbol
Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
199
Topo USA User Guide
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Click Remove.
The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and the
next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
7. Click OK when finished.
Symbol Editing Tools
Draw Tool Box
DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the
Symbol Editing Grid independently of the DeLorme mapping program. The tools provided
help you to create unique symbols to add to your map.
The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box.
Pencil—Draw freehand lines within the grid.
Line—Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want within the
grid.
Ellipse—Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or
shape of the ellipse you want.
Filled Ellipse—Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve
the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want.
Rectangle—Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the
size of the rectangle you want.
Filled Rectangle—Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until you
achieve the size of the filled rectangle you want.
Fill—Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from the color
palette.
Select—Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the Symbol
Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another symbol in the grid.
200
Using the Draw Tools
Using the Transparency Option
The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as transparent
in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping program. For
example, you may want to view the symbol object without the square of the surrounding
background color. You would then select the background color to appear transparent.
To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent
Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Select the Transparent option under Transparency.
7. Click the Select Color tool
.
The pointer changes to a dropper tool.
8. Select the color on the symbol you want to appear transparent.
The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected color, and the Image
Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent.
9. To display all colors, select the Opaque option under Transparency.
The Image Preview reflects this change.
10. Click OK when finished.
Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not repeated in
another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque. Select a new color from the color
palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as transparent with the new
color. Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in the symbol grid.
Anchor Position
201
Topo USA User Guide
Being aware of cursor position is important for choosing the anchor position of a symbol.
The anchor is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic
coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed. Any newly created
symbol, whether imported, pasted or dragged into the XSym Symbol Editing Grid, has a
default position of center anchor.
XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol.
To Select the Anchor Position
Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol.
1. Once your symbol is created, click the Anchor Position
button.
When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid, it changes to a small cross
hair (plus sign).
2. Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position your anchor.
The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text to the
right of the Anchor Position button. The large cross hair in the Symbol Editing Grid
moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor position.
To Center the Anchor Position
Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol Editing
Grid.
Cursor Position
Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square. Each of these pixels is represented in
the Symbol Editing Grid. When you move your cursor over the Symbol Editing Grid, the
cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the Cursor Position text next to the
Image Preview (as shown below).
Image Preview and Cursor Position
As you move the cursor over the grid, the numbers update according to where you are in
the 24 x 24 grid. The first number in the above sample, 16, refers to the number of pixels
across (the X coordinate) from the upper left corner of the grid, beginning with zero. The
second number, 14, refers to the number of pixels down (the Y coordinate) from the upperleft corner of the grid, beginning with zero.
Symbol Sets
202
Using the Draw Tools
Creating a New Symbol Set
Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) which can
contain up to 250 symbols.
To Create a New Symbol Set
Use the following steps to create a new symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select [New...] from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set. The default
name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet.
5. Import a bitmap into your new symbol set.
OR
Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set.
To Create a New Symbol Set from an Existing Symbol Set
You can make a copy of an existing symbol set and save it as a custom symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to copy from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set.
You can edit symbols, create symbols, or import bitmaps for your new symbol set.
Opening a Symbol Set
Open an existing symbol set (.dim) to add new symbols or edit existing ones.
To Open a Symbol Set
Use the following steps to open a symbol set.
203
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool
to
.
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens. The symbol selection for the new symbol set
displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid displays the first symbol
of the new symbol set.
204
Routing
Creating a Route
You can create a road, trail, or direct route using the Route tab, right-click feature, or the
toolbar. Once you create a route, you can use the Route tab to view route directions, edit a
route, and display routes on a map.
Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences. To show/remove routing
MapNotes, waypoint labels, state borders, and route vias, enable/disable GPS voice
navigation, or to change the default speed, road type, or routing preference, see Setting
Your Routing Preferences.
Important If you have only the left map window open, the route start, finish, via, and stop
icons in the Route tab and on toolbar are grayed out. To activate the options, use the map
resize tool to expose the right map window.
To Create a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click New/Edit (if it is not already selected).
2. Click File, click New, and then type the name for your route in the Name text box.
3. Click the Start tool
and then click the point on the map where you want to begin
your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your start location, select Start From Address
Book from the Start drop-down list, click to select an Address Book entry, and then
click OK.
OR
To use your current GPS position as your start location, select Start From GPS
Location from the Start drop-down list.
OR
Type your start location in the Start drop-down text box. You can type the name of
an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state OR
street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab) must be
selected to search for address book contact names.
205
Topo USA User Guide
4. Optional. Add or insert stops or vias.
5. Click the Finish tool
and then click the spot on the map where you want to end
your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your finish location, select Finish From Address
Book from the Finish drop-down list, click to select an Address Book entry, and
then click OK.
OR
Type your finish location in the Finish drop-down text box. You can type in the name
of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state OR
street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab) must be
selected to search for address book contact names.
6. Select a calculation method — the program adjusts the default calculation values
based on your selection:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot.
7. Select a route type (Road-Quickest, Road-Shortest, Trail, or Direct) from the
drop-down list.
8. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate.
If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a dialog
box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search results
until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then click
OK.
9. Click Directions to view the route directions.
AND/OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
AND/OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Create a Route Using the Right-click Function
206
Routing
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Right-click the map location where you want to begin your route, point to Create
Route, and click Set as Start.
2. Optional. Add or insert stops or vias.
3. Right-click the map location where you want to end your route, point to Create
Route, and click Set as Finish.
4. If the route doesn't automatically calculate, right-click the route, point to Manage
Route, and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road Shortest, Calculate
Trail, or Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
5. Optional. Click the Route tab. Then click the Directions subtab to view the route
directions, the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options, Plan Trip to
assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route, or Back on Track to add your
current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Create a Route Using the Toolbar
Click here to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar.
Tutorial: Create a Route
There are several different methods for creating a route on the Route tab. You can
designate a start, stop, via, and finish for your route. You can also designate:
•
Your method of transportation—car, bicycle, or on foot
•
The route calculation—road quickest, road shortest, direct, or trail. Special routing
preferences, such as establishing speeds for particular road types, preferred roads,
roads to avoid, and more.
You can also create a route on a map using the right-click function or with the route buttons
on the toolbar. These two features let you create routes while using any tab in the program.
For more information on using these alternative methods, see Creating a Route.
For more information about adding stops and vias, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
This tutorial provides steps for creating a hiking trail route with the Route tab.
207
Topo USA User Guide
Step 1—Set the route start
Click the Route tab and type the start location for your route in the Start text box.
Step 2—Add a stop
Assign your first stop by typing it in the Stop text box. Since you are adding your stops in
the order you want to reach them along your route, make sure the Add option is selected
and then click Add to assign the stop.
Note The Stop text box clears itself after you click the Add button. This allows you to use
the text box to add more stops.
Step 3—Add a second stop
Assign your second stop using the same procedure outlined in step 2.
Step 4—Set the route finish
Since you want to finish your route where you started, use the same finish location that you
used for your start point in step 1.
Step 5—Select your activity type
To ensure the route is calculated for your activity, select the Walking/Jogging button and
then select Trail as the route calculation method.
Step 6—Calculate the route
Click Calculate to calculate the trail. The route displays on the map.
208
Routing
Tip Select the Auto check box next to the Calculate button to automatically calculate the
route after you add each point.
Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias
Use stops and vias to route you through a particular place or along a particular road. You
can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create using the Route tab, the route
options on the toolbar, or by right-clicking the map (2-D only).
•
A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed from.
•
A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through.
•
Add stops or vias to follow a route in a particular order.
•
Insert stops or vias to arrange them geographically in the route.
Tips
•
Turn off Auto Calculate when you are adding many stops and vias.
•
Use Add instead of Insert when your start and finish are at the same place.
•
Don't place the finish point until you add all your stops and vias.
•
Place vias near the beginning of the road or trail you want to use.
•
When you calculate the route, if it goes to a via and then returns to the original path,
insert another via toward the end of that road (where you want to turn onto the next
road) to force it to use that road.
•
When using a road as a stop or via, zoom in to ensure you select the correct road.
The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it.
To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route
209
Topo USA User Guide
The Add Stop/Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the route. Use
the following steps to add a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to the
Stop tool
(if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool
(if you are adding a via) is
labeled Add. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button and select Add.
3. To add a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click the
location on the map.
OR
•
To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.
•
To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.
•
Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats: street
address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
•
Right-click the map to add a last stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to add the last stop or via.
2. Point to Create Route, and then click Add as Last Stop or Add as
Last Via.
•
Use the toolbar to add a stop or via.
2. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route to
include the stop or via.
OR
210
Routing
Click the Calculate button
on the toolbar.
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage Route,
and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road Shortest, Calculate Trail, or
Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
3. Click Directions to view the route directions.
OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route. Use the
following steps to insert a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to the
Stop tool
(if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool
(if you are adding a via) is
labeled Insert. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button and select Insert.
3. To insert a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click the
location on the map.
OR
•
To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.
•
To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
211
Topo USA User Guide
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.
•
Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats: street
address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
•
Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via.
2. Point to Create Route, and then click Insert Stop or Insert Via.
•
Use the toolbar to insert a stop or via.
3. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route to
include the stop or via.
OR
Click the Calculate button
on the toolbar.
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage Route,
and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road Shortest, Calculate Trail, or
Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
4. Click Directions to view the route directions.
OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a via to the current route.
Changing the Routing Method
212
Routing
You can change your routing calculation method at any time. You may need to do this to
update your routing preferences.
To Change the Route Calculation Method
1. From the Route tab, click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Select a calculation method:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot.
3. Select a route type (Road-Shortest, Road-Quickest, Trail, or Direct) from the
drop-down list.
Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route
You can change the properties of a stop along your route by using the Stop Prefs function in
the Advanced sub-tab under Route.
To Change the Properties of a Stop
Use the following steps to change the properties of a stop.
1. Click the Route tab and then click Advanced.
2. Click a stop from the waypoint list and then click Stop Prefs.
The Stop Time Preferences dialog box opens.
3. To designate the stop as an end of day stop, select the End of Day check box, click
Apply, and then click Done.
OR
To designate the stop as a fuel break, select the Fuel check box, click Apply, select
the Duration check box, select the duration of the fuel break using the Hrs and Mins
drop-down lists, and then click Done.
Note It is not necessary to allocate a fuel stop duration.
Viewing Route Directions
After you create a route, you can view the accompanying route directions.
To View the Route Directions
Use the following steps to view the route directions.
213
Topo USA User Guide
1. Click the Route tab and then click Directions to open the Route Directions dialog
area.
The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left. A selected
check box indicates the route is displaying on the map.
2. Click a route to select and highlight it.
OR
Double-click a route to center it on the map.
3. The route directions for the selected route display in the right window. Adjust the
size of the tab area to expand the view.
Tip Click the header of a column to open a menu from which you can select the type
of information you want to display in each column.
4. Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg.
OR
Double-click a leg to center the map on the leg.
Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver, select the GPS Track check box to follow along
with the route directions in real time as you travel. Click Show Turns to display the current
distance and time to your finish.
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing
If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highlypopulated area with a lot of traffic congestion, you can draw a circle/rectangle/polygon over
that area to avoid it when you calculate your route. You can create multiple regions to
avoid.
To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing
Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area.
3. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
to view its hidden
options. Select the tool you want to use.
4. Optional. Select one or more of the following:
•
From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to the draw
object.
214
Routing
•
Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select the
color for your fill style.
•
Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline drop-down list.
•
Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your draw
object.
•
Select the width for your draw object outline from the Width drop-down list.
•
Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement
information for your draw object as your draw it on the map.
5. If you selected the Circle tool, click the location for the circle's center on the map
and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as soon as you
achieve the radius you want.
The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle's center display in the
corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area.
OR
If you selected the Polygon tool, click the map to enter each point of the polygon.
OR
If you selected the Rectangle tool, click the location for the rectangle's upper-left
corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width, height, and area
for the rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size you want.
6. Right-click the draw object, point to Manage Draw, and click Route Avoid. If the
object has no name, it the name "Route Avoid" is visible on the map.
7. If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab, click the
Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route.
Note To undo your route avoid, right-click it on the map, point to Manage Draw, and click
Route Avoid to clear the check box. To delete the route avoid from the map, click the
Select tool in the Draw tab and click the draw object on the map. Then, press the DELETE
key on your keyboard.
Saving Route Directions as Text
You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file.
To Save Your Route Directions
Use the following steps to save your directions.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
If you do not have a route in this project, the Route Options are unavailable.
215
Topo USA User Guide
2. Select the route you want to save from the Name drop-down list.
If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop-down list, you may
not have the correct project open.
3. Under Options, select Directions or Along the Way.
4. Click the Save button
on the Route tab.
5. To rename the .txt file, type the new name in the File Name text box and click
Save.
Setting Your Routing Preferences
Once you master basic routing, you can customize your routing preferences and create
more advanced routes.
•
The routing preferences allow you to favor or avoid various road types when
calculating your route. You can also set your speed preferences.
•
The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating
the route.
•
To change your route calculation method, see Changing the Routing Methods.
To Set Your Routing Preferences
Use the following steps to set your routing preferences.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. Select the route type (Direct, Trail, or Road) from the Route Type drop-down list.
4. From the Road Type drop-down list, select the road type for which to set
preferences.
5. If you selected Trail or Road as your route type in step 3, select Preferred,
Standard, or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop-down list.
Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible, Standard is the default level,
and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible. An avoided road may be used
when no other road is available.
6. In the Speed text box, type your average driving speed for this road type.
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route.
7. If you selected Road as your route type in step 3, type your average driving speed
within an urban area for this road type in the Urban Speed text box.In the Urban
Speed text box, type your average driving speed within an urban area.
216
Routing
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route. The Urban Speed text
box is available only for road routes.
8. Repeat these steps for each road type.
9. When you are finished setting your road preferences, click Review to display your
settings.
10. In the Route Features list, select the check box for each feature you want to
display:
•
Show Location MapNotes–Displays Location MapNotes with their coordinate
information for each point in your route.
•
Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about your route.
•
Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information for each
waypoint and the finish point of your route.
•
Display Waypoint Labels–Displays start/stop/via/finish labels on the map
when the route is created.
•
Include State Borders–Shows or hides state borders in your route
directions (only available when Road is the selected route type).
•
GPS Voice Navigation–Provides spoken route directions when you are
tracking with a GPS receiver. After initializing, the computer speaks the
directions for the next turn in your route. It repeats the instructions
approximately 90 seconds prior to arriving at the turn.
•
Display Route Vias—Shows or hides your route vias on the map.
11. In the Voice Alert text box, type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want to
elapse before the computer alerts you of your next two turns.
Note Because it may take the computer a while to speak turn information, it is
recommended that you designate at least 60 seconds for the voice alert.
12. Click Done.
Note Click Use Defaults to restore all route preferences and road type preferences to the
default settings.
Editing a Route
You can modify existing routes by:
•
Adding, removing, and rearranging stops and vias.
•
Adjusting your route preferences based on road type.
217
Topo USA User Guide
•
Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed.
•
Reversing a route.
Tips
•
Zoom in to set accurate points for your route.
•
Use the right-click option for routing. Just right-click the route, stop, or via, point to
Manage Route, and click the applicable option.
To Edit a Route
To edit a route, click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab. Select the route
from the Name drop-down list box. The route becomes active. The following list describes
the edit functions.
•
To change the route name, select the name in the Name text box, type the new
route name, and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
•
To change a start or finish route point, click the corresponding tool and then click the
new spot on the map.
Note If you try to add a start point to an existing route, the "Would you like to
move your Start location or create a New route?" message opens. Click New to
create a new route. Click Move to move the Start to the last location clicked.
•
To move a route point (start, finish, stop, or via), click the corresponding tool, click
and hold the point on the map, and then drag it to the new location.
•
To add or insert a stop or via to your route, click the corresponding tool and then
click the spot on the map where you want to add or insert your stop or via. For more
information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
•
To rearrange stops and vias, click the point to select it and then click the Move Up
or Move Down
•
tools to relocate it in the route.
To delete a stop or via, select the stop or via in the route list and then click the
Delete button.
•
To change a stop to a via, select the stop and click Make Via. To change a via to a
stop, select the via and click Make Stop.
•
Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route.
•
Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New/Edit subtab.
•
Click Stop Prefs to make a stop in your route a fuel or end of day stop. For more
information, see Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences.
218
Routing
Editing Roads
You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to:
•
Two Way
•
One Way N or E
•
No Left Turn N or E
•
No Right Turn N or E
•
No Way
•
One Way S or W
•
No Left Turn S or W
•
No Right Turn S or W
To Edit a Road
Use the following steps to edit a road.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Edit Roads.
3. Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the map.
4. Click the Select tool
and select the road on the map you want to edit.
5. Select a direction.
•
If you select Two Way, you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn.
•
If you select One Way, you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn.
•
If you select No Way, you cannot select any other options.
Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings. Click
Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties to their
default settings.
6. Click Done.
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote
The easiest way to label your route points (start, stop, via, and finish) with a MapNote is to
use the Route Preferences section of the Route tab.
If you select more than one option, each category of information (location, comments,
and/or summary) displays in the same MapNote.
To Label a Route Point with a MapNote
219
Topo USA User Guide
Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. Under Route Features, select the check box next to each MapNote you want to
display at your route points:
•
Show Location MapNotes–Displays the coordinate information for each point in
your route.
•
Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about each point of the route
as specified in the Route Advanced subtab.
To modify route comments, click the Route tab, click the Advanced subtab,
select the route, and then click in the Comments column twice (do not double
click) next to the route point you want to create a comment for. The information
you type in the Comments field for that point is placed in a Comments MapNote
when you selected to show it on the map.
•
Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information for each
point in your route.
4. Click Done.
Moving Route MapNotes
You can move route MapNotes. The text box moves, but the point stays on the map
location.
To show/delete route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
To move and delete draw Map Notes, see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes.
To Move a Route MapNote
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click the Move Route MapNotes button
.
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Drag the text box to the new location.
Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map
220
Routing
All the routes you create are automatically displayed. The active route displays as a gold
line outlined in red. Each inactive route displays as a dashed, orange line outlined in green.
You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting them from the map.
To Display a Route on the Map
Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, select the check box next to the route you want to
display.
OR
To center the map on the route, double-click the route name.
To Hide a Route on the Map
Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, clear the check box next to each route you want to hide
from view on the map.
OR
Right-click the route you want to clear from the map view, point to Manage Route,
and then click Hide Route.
To Center the Map on a Route
Use the following steps to center a route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. Double-click the route in the route list on the left.
Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view, click the Route tab, click the
New/Edit subtab, and select the route from the Name drop-down list.
Saving a Route
The route in memory is retained as you create it. You are prompted to save your route
when you create a new project or exit the program.
•
Creating a new project–When you click File/New in the Files dialog area on the
Map Files tab, you are asked if you want to save changes to the most recently used
project. A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes to an unsaved route.
221
Topo USA User Guide
•
Exiting the application–The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save
your changes.
You can also save the route using the Route tab.
Routes have .anr extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Navigation.
To Save a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
3. Click File and then click Save.
Deleting a Route
You can permanently delete routes.
To Delete a Route
Use the following steps to delete a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Select the route from the Name drop-down list.
3. Click File and then click Delete.
OR
Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Delete Route.
Importing Routes
Routes can be imported from many other DeLorme mapping programs using the Route tab.
To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import dialog box opens.
3. Browse to select the route file and then click Open.
The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name drop-down list.
Tutorial: Plan a Long Distance Trip
222
Routing
When you are using DeLorme Topo North America to plan a long trip, use the many features
on the Route tab to customize your route.
Before you leave on your trip
Step 1—Create your route
Create a route—there are several ways to do this. When you create a route, you can add or
insert stops or vias if you want to travel through specific locations. In this scenario, we
created a route from Yarmouth, Maine, to Tucson, Arizona, and inserted several vias
because we want to go through specific locations.
Click the Advanced button on the Route tab to see the route details.
Tip Another thing you can do on the Advanced subtab is set your route preferences to fine
tune the way the route is created.
Step 2—Set your end of day and fuel break preferences
Click Plan Trip on the Route tab and set your preferences. Then, click Apply. Your End of
Day Breaks and Fuel Breaks are displayed on the map.
To view the estimated fuel cost, click Fuel Cost.
223
Topo USA User Guide
Step 3—Print your route map and directions
You can print your route map and directions.
1. Click the Print tab and then click Route.
2. Select your options and click View to see a preview.
Step 4—Save your map file!
Save your map file so you can make sure have everything ready when you begin your trip.
Using GPS
If you are using a GPS device with your program on a portable computer to navigate the
route you created, use the following steps.
NavMode is the default view when GPS tracking. If you want to use the tab view when
travelling, click the NavMode
button on the toolbar. For more information about
NavMode and the GPS tab, see Using NavMode or GPS Tab View.
Step 1—Get ready to travel
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Check your GPS preferences on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.
3. Click the GPS button
•
on the toolbar to start your GPS.
If you are using a GPS device that is not a DeLorme Earthmate GPS device,
you need to initialize it.
•
If your GPS location is not the same as the start location of your trip, you will
be prompted to navigate with it or hide it. Click Navigate.
4. If your map file is not open, open it.
Step 2—Optional. Find points of interest along your route
You can use the GPS Radar option on the Find tab to find points of interest along your route
as you travel.
224
Routing
1. Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find Tab in the Options dialog box. If you are
using NavMode, make sure the Repeat the search every... check box is selected.
2. Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category of
interest.
If you selected the Search only in direction of travel check box in the Options
dialog box, you won't have to back track to make your next stop; however, if you're
driving in a very rural area, the closest point of interest may be behind you. For
more information, see the Find Points of Interest on a Route tutorial and Finding
Points Near Your Current Location.
Step 3—Start driving
If you have set up speech recognition software, you can ask the computer questions like,
"What is the next turn?" or "Where am I?" For more information, see Voice Overview. This
view shows the beginning of our trip using NavMode.
225
Topo USA User Guide
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences
You can schedule end of day and fuel breaks along a route by using the Plan Trip option in
the Route tab. You can schedule end of day breaks according to the miles (or other distance
unit selected in Map Display) or hours driven and you can schedule fuel breaks according to
your current fuel level, your vehicle's fuel consumption rate, and so on.
This feature works with the route preferences you have designated with the Route
Preferences option under Route. For more information, see Setting Your Routing
Preferences.
You can also estimate the fuel cost for your route.
To Set Your End of Day and Fuel Stop Preferences
Use the following steps to set your time preferences.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click Plan Trip.
•
Select the Estimate End of Day Breaks check box to schedule end of day
breaks for your trip.
Select Hours per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a
•
designated number of hours traveled per day. Then, type the number
of hours you want to travel per day in the Hours Per Day text box.
Use the Flexibility drop-down list to determine the amount of time
you want to be flexible between breaks and defined stops. For
example, if you selected 1.5 Hrs from the Flexibility drop-down list and
have an end of day break within 1.5 hours of a planned stop, the end
of day break is moved to the planned stop.
OR
•
Select mi per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a
designated number of miles traveled per day. Then, type the number of
miles you want to travel per day in the Mi Per Day text box. Use the
Flexibility drop-down list to determine the number of miles you want
to be flexible between breaks and defined stops. For example, if you
selected 50 mi from the Flexibility drop-down list and have an end of
day break within 50 miles of a planned stop, the end of day break is
moved to the planned stop.
226
Routing
Note the unit of measurement used is based on your units of
measurement setting.
•
Select the Estimate Fuel Breaks check box to schedule fuel breaks for your
trip.
•
Type the fuel tank capacity (in gallons) in the Tank Cap text box.
•
Type the fuel consumption rate (in miles per gallon or the distance unit
you have selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog) for your
vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box.
•
Select the amount closest to your current fuel tank level from the
Starting level drop-down list.
•
Select the amount of fuel you would like to have in your tank when
warned to stop for fuel from the Warning Level drop-down list.
3. Click Apply.
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route
The Plan Trip subtab of the Route tab lets you estimate the fuel cost for your route using
the fuel rate (how many gallons of fuel your vehicle uses per mile/kilometer traveled) and
fuel price per gallon.
To Estimate the Fuel Cost of Your Route
Use the following steps to estimate the fuel cost of your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Plan Trip subtab on the Route tab.
3. Click Fuel Cost.
4. Type the fuel rate for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box. The fuel rate can often
be found in the vehicle's owners manual.
5. Type the price of your fuel in the Fuel Price text box.
The estimated fuel cost (in U.S. dollars) for your route automatically calculates when
you enter information in the Fuel Rate and Fuel Price text boxes. The estimated fuel
cost for your route displays in the Total Fuel Cost field.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the Plan Trip subtab.
Converting a Route to a GPS Log
You can convert any route to a GPS log file (.gpl).
To Convert a Route to a GPS Log File
227
Topo USA User Guide
Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file.
1. Create a route.
2. Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Save as GPS Log
File. The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default location is
C:\DeLorme Docs
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.
228
Using GPS
GPS Overview
Using your DeLorme application, a portable computer, and your GPS receiver, you can
display a "bread crumb trail" to track your progress as you travel.
You have two ways to use GPS in your mapping application:
•
NavMode–This is a full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the
tabs are is minimized and the Control Panel is hidden, but you can opt to show them.
•
Tab view–This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control tracking and the
Route> Advanced tab to control navigating. By default, the tabs and Control Panel
are visible, but you can opt to hide them. It is available only in 2-D mode.
For more information, see Using NavMode or Tab View.
•
Safety
Warnings
Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving
a vehicle.
•
Do not use this application with automatic navigation, guidance
systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance
or direction.
GPS Options/Initializing GPS
Before beginning your GPS setup, read the user manual for your GPS receiver. Also, ensure
you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your GPS receiver to
the communications port of your portable computer.
If you have an Earthmate GPS device, it is automatically activated when it is connected.
Just click Start GPS to begin tracking.
The GPS and NavMode toolbar buttons are hidden by default. To show them, right-click the
toolbar and click GPS/NavMode.
To Set GPS Options
•
Manually change the location coordinates
229
Topo USA User Guide
Each time you track with GPS, the initialization process uses the coordinates from
the last initialized location.
Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your choice.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode
specified in your owner manual, and then turn the receiver on.
2. Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab.
3. Under GPS Options, verify that the Automatically detect GPS check box is
cleared.
4. Type the coordinates in the text boxes.
Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box.
OR
Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude and longitude of
the current map center.
•
Update the date/time options
You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change the date and
time settings used by the GPS device to those of your choice.
Use the following steps to change the date and/or time settings.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode
specified in your user manual, and then turn the receiver on.
2. Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab.
3. To use the date and time on your computer, select the Use Current System
Date/Time check box.
OR
To use the time and date of your choice, clear the Use Current System
Date/Time check box, and then:
•
To manually set the time, select the time zone from the Zone dropdown box, and if Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect where you
are, select the DST check box. Then, use the scroll box to select the
desired time.
Note Time is displayed in 24-hour format, with Midnight as 00:00:00.
•
To manually set the date, click the down arrow next to the Date field
and select the date from the calendar.
230
Using GPS
•
Set your preferences
You can set various options for how GPS works.
Use the following steps to change the When tracking... and GPS Options.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the GPS Settings tab.
2. Set the preferences you want to use.
When tracking...
•

Use NavMode–Enables a hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2D or 3-D.

Snap to route–Automatically locates the place on the route that is closest to
your vehicle's current location.

Start GPS log–Automatically generates a GPS log.

Use High-Contrast colors–Automatically enables high-contrast map colors.

Magnify map–Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified
magnification (125%, 150%, 175%, or 200%).

Recenter map on GPS–Automatically centers the map on the GPS.

Rotate map in GPS direction–Automatically rotates the 2-D/3-D map in the
direction of travel. Direction of travel always displays as the top of the screen,
regardless of compass direction.

Auto zoom to turn (2-D only)–Automatically pans and zooms the map to
display both the current GPS position and the position of the next turn. Select
data zoom levels from the Minimum zoom and Maximum zoom drop-down
lists to stop the map from zooming out/in further than you want it to when
approaching the next turn.

Show GPS bread-crumb trail–Automatically displays your GPS progress on
the map as a "bread-crumb" trail up to the maximum specified number of
points. 5,000 points is approximately one hour and 20 minutes worth of
points. This setting does not affect the number of points captured in the GPS
log file. To change the point number, type the new number in the Trail
length box.

Enable GPS voice navigation–Provides spoken directions when tracking a
route with a GPS receiver.
231
Topo USA User Guide

Recalculate when off route–Automatically recalculates the route by the
designated threshold distance (100 ft, 200 ft, 300 ft, 400 ft, or 500 ft) when
the GPS is off of the route.

Display GPS overview (2-D only)–When selected, opens the GPS overview
window after the GPS is connected. You can adjust the size of the map and
overview areas. The overview map does not display when you use NavMode
in 3-D.

Disable screen saver–Overrides the system screen saver so that the display
stays activated during GPS tracking.
GPS Options

Start GPS with the program–Automatically starts GPS tracking each time
you open the program.

Automatically detect GPS–Automatically sets up your GPS connection.
Suggestion: If your GPS receiver has a USB cable, select Automatically Detect
GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device and that a
connection can be made.

Enable WAAS use (USB Earthmate)–Enables WAAS use.

Enable LED on GPS device (USB Earthmate)—Turns on the LED on the
Earthmate. When the check box is cleared, the LED does not display.
To Initialize Your GPS Receiver
If you are using a non-DeLorme Earthmate GPS receiver, you must initialize it before you
use it. The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the
correct communications (COM) port and updates the current settings. Use the following
procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with your application.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode specified
in your user manual, and then turn the on receiver, if necessary.
2. Click the GPS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from the
current map display.
3. Click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the GPS tab.
OR
Click the GPS tab and click the Options button
232
.
Using GPS
4. From the Device drop-down list, select the type of GPS receiver you are using. If
your device is not listed, select Generic NMEA.
Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default settings for the
selected device.
5. From the Port drop-down list, select the communications port you are using to
attach the GPS receiver to your computer. See your computer manual for further
information.
6. You can also change the location coordinates, update the date/time options, set
tracking options, and select GPS options. See To Set GPS Options above.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Start GPS on the GPS tab
OR
Click the Start GPS button
on the toolbar.
Notes
•
The status of your GPS connection displays on the screen. Once your GPS receiver
acquires a fix on your location, your position on the map displays as a yellow or
green dot that changes to an arrow as you travel. For more information, see
Monitoring Your GPS Status.
•
While your receiver is acquiring data, many red dots display on your map (except
with Magellan receivers). You may have to zoom in to see them clearly. These red
dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS receiver as it is acquiring data.
•
Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving.
•
If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup (the default configuration), it
reserves the COM port. If that is the one where the GPS receiver is attached, you
must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to initialize. To do this, right-click
the HotSync icon on the taskbar and click Exit. If you have two COM ports, verify the
correct COM port is selected for use with your application. This pertains to older
devices.
•
Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver should be
directed to its manufacturer.
Using NavMode or Tab View
233
Topo USA User Guide
The tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control tracking and the Route >
Advanced tab to control navigating. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but
you can opt to hide them.
You can also use NavMode—a hands free, full-screen view that you can display in 2-D or 3D.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode
appears indented
button on the toolbar. When the button
, NavMode is on.
Notes
•
The GPS and NavMode toolbar buttons are hidden by default. To show them, rightclick the toolbar and click GPS/NavMode.
•
The button is grayed out
back a GPS log file.
unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing
You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button
also click the Options button
on the toolbar and click the GPS tab. You can
on the GPS tab.
2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on.
3. Click OK.
NavMode Display
•
Next Turn—The distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
Dist to Finish—The distance to the finish point on your route, based on the units
selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
Speed—Displays the speed you are traveling, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
ETA—The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route. This is based on the
time and time zone set on your computer. If your trip goes beyond the current day,
the day of arrival also displays. The ETA does not include any layover time at a stop.
•
Radar Results—If you are using GPS Radar, an orange bar displays the closest
search result. Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your route. Click More Info to
open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more information about the
result. Click Stop Radar to stop searching.
234
Using GPS
•
Progress Bar—The progress bar displays below the orange bar. It shows how far
along you are in your route by distance.
•
Turns—The blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large text
and the following turn in smaller text. An arrow showing the direction of each turn
displays next to the text.
•
Zoom In/Out—Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map in. Click the
minus sign to zoom the map out.
•
Left 2-D or 3-D/Right 2-D–You can choose to view the left map in 2-D or 3-D or
the right map in 2-D. Click the button for the view you want. To view both the right
and left map, use the resize tool to change the map area.
Route Tab Display
•
Next Turn–Displays the next turn and a turn graphic indicating the direction; the
distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the Display tab in the
Options dialog box; and the time to the next turn.
•
Next Stop–The distance and estimated time to the next stop.
•
Finish–The distance and estimated time to the finish.
•
Click the Show More Turns button
to view information for the turn after the
following turn.
•
Click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area.
Tutorial: Route with GPS—NavMode
This tutorial explains routing with GPS in NavMode using your laptop computer or smallscreen device. This is the default GPS view—a hands free full-screen view that you can
display in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized;
however, you can change your display options. If you are playing back a GPS log file, the
tab area is not minimized so you have access to the controls.
You can also route with GPS using GPS tab view. To learn more about routing with GPS in
tab view, see the Route with GPS-Tab View tutorial.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode
appears indented
button on the toolbar. When the button
NavMode is on.
235
Topo USA User Guide
Note The button is grayed out
unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing
back a GPS log file.
To learn more about using your GPS with your application, see the Help topics under Using
GPS.
Step 1—Get ready
Create a Route
Before you get ready to leave on your trip, use the application to create a route using your
current GPS location as the route start point and your destination as your finish. You can
create routes using the Route tab, the toolbar, or the right-click menu; in this tutorial, we
are using the toolbar.
Find POIs
You can set up your application to automatically find points of interest using the GPS Radar
option.
1. Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category of
interest. For this tutorial, we want to know where we can find gas stations.
2. If you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box, you won't have to back
track to make your next stop; however, if you're driving in a very rural area, you
may not want to use this feature because the closest point of interest may be behind
you.
3. Select the Repeat Search Every check box and enter a number of minutes.
Important You must select this for your results to display.
4. If you want to hear the search results, click the Speech button.
5. From the Search Area scroll list, select a distance in miles to limit your search to a
certain driving distance from your current location.
For more information about GPS Radar, see Finding Points Near Your Current Location.
236
Using GPS
Step 2—Start the GPS
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Start DeLorme Topo North America.
3. Make sure the NavMode button
4. Click the GPS button
on the toolbar is on (appears indented).
on the toolbar to start your GPS.
If you are using a GPS device that is not an Earthmate GPS device, and you have not
initialized it in the mapping program before, you will need to initialize the device
using the GPS Settings tab in the Options dialog box.
Note If you do not see the GPS button on the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and
select the GPS/Exchange option.
Step 3—Start driving
The computer speaks the route directions as you drive. If you are using speech recognition
software, you can ask the computer questions like, "What is the next turn?" or "Where am
I?"
NavMode in 2-D
NavMode Display
237
Topo USA User Guide
•
Next Turn—The distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
Dist to Finish—The distance to the finish point on your route, based on the units
selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
Speed—Displays the speed you are traveling, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
•
ETA—The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route. This is based on the
time and time zone set on your computer. If your trip goes beyond the current day,
the day of arrival also displays. The ETA does not include any layover time at a stop.
•
Radar Results—If you are using GPS Radar, an orange bar displays the closest
search result. Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your route. Click More Info to
open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more information about the
result. Click Stop Radar to stop searching.
•
Progress Bar—The progress bar displays below the orange bar. It shows how far
along you are in your route by distance.
•
Turns—The blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large text
and the following turn in smaller text. An arrow showing the direction of each turn
displays next to the text.
•
Zoom In/Out—Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map in. Click the
minus sign to zoom the map out.
•
Left 2-D or 3-D/Right 2-D—You can choose to view the left map in 2-D or 3-D or
the right map in 2-D. Click the button for the view you want. To view both the right
and left map, use the resize tool to change the map area.
NavMode in 3-D
238
Using GPS
Tutorial: Route with GPS—Tab View
This tutorial explains routing with GPS in GPS tab view on your laptop computer. This option
allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking. By default, the tabs and
Control Panel are visible, but you can opt to hide them. It is available only in 2-D mode.
To turn NavMode (the default view) off so you can use GPS tab view, click the NavMode
button on the toolbar.
To learn more about NavMode, see the Route with GPS - NavMode tutorial.
To learn more about using your GPS with your application, see the Help topics under Using
GPS.
Step 1—Get ready
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Start DeLorme Topo North America.
Step 2—Start the GPS
239
Topo USA User Guide
Click the GPS button
on the toolbar to start your GPS.
If you are using a GPS device that is not an Earthmate GPS device, and you have not
initialized it in DeLorme Topo North America before, you will need to initialize the device
using the GPS Settings tab in the Options dialog box.
Note If you do not see the GPS button on the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and select the
GPS/NavMode option.
Step 3—Create your route
Create a route using your current GPS location as the route start point and your destination
as your finish. You can create routes using the Route tab, the toolbar, or right-click
functionality; in this tutorial, we are using the toolbar.
Step 4—Show turns
Click the Show Turns button on the GPS tab.
OR
Click the Route tab, click the Directions subtab, and click Show Turns.
An arrow indicates your direction of travel. Click the More button to get information on the
turn after your next turn.
Step 5—Start driving
Your current position displays on the map as a green/yellow circle—green indicates a 3-D
fix, yellow indicates a 2-D fix—and the computer speaks the route directions. If you have
set up speech recognition software, you can ask the computer questions like, "What is the
next turn?" or "Where am I?" For more information, see Voice Overview.
Step 6—Find points of interest near your location
Running low on gas? Maybe you're hungry and want to find the nearest fast food
restaurant? Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category
240
Using GPS
of interest.
If you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box, you won't have to back track to
make your next stop; however, if you're driving in a very rural area, the closest point of
interest may be behind you. For more information, see Finding Points Near Your Current
Location.
Tracking a Route with GPS
When tracking, you can follow along a road route you created using any of the routing
methods in your mapping program. As you travel, the current leg (segment) of your route is
highlighted on the map.
Notes
•
The GPS and NavMode toolbar buttons are hidden by default. To show them, right-click
the toolbar and click GPS/NavMode.
•
To automatically recalculate your route when off track, on the Route tab, select the
Auto check box next to the Back on Track button on the New/Edit subtab. If you do
not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track, clear the
Back on Track check box and click Back on Track whenever you want to recalculate
the route based on the current GPS position.
•
If you want to create a log of your travels, select the Start GPS Log check box in the
GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically. Or, click the Record button in the
GPS Log subtab to log manually start recording.
•
The Turns option is available in routes only when GPS tracking.
To Start GPS Tracking
Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel.
1. Create a route.
Important
If the current project includes hidden routes, they may recalculate if
you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected the Recalculate
When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings. To ensure this does not occur, clear
these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want to recalculate.
2. Connect your GPS device to your computer.
241
Topo USA User Guide
3. Initialize the device. This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate GPS
device.
4. In NavMode, click the GPS button
on the toolbar.
OR
In GPS tab view, click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab. For more
information, see Monitoring Your GPS Status. Then, click Start GPS or click the GPS
button
on the toolbar.
To Stop GPS Tracking
In NavMode, click the GPS button
In GPS tab view, click the GPS button
on the toolbar.
on the toolbar or click the GPS tab and then click
Stop GPS.
Getting Back on Track When Off Course
To automatically recalculate your route when off course, select the Auto check box next to
the Back on Track button in the Route tab. If you do not want the program to automatically
recalculate your route when off track, clear the Auto check box and click the Back on
Track button to manually recalculate the route.
Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking
When using the application with a GPS receiver to track a route, your map automatically
pans and redraws as you travel, always indicating your position on the map when Center on
GPS is activated.
To Automatically Pan the Map
The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work together
to automatically pan the map.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the GPS Settings tab.
OR
Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button
.
2. Under When Tracking, clear the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you pan the
map manually during GPS tracking, Center on GPS displays in the Control Panel.
OR
242
Using GPS
Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you pan the map manually during
GPS tracking, the map automatically re-centers itself on your location after 5
seconds.
3. Click OK.
4. Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS.
OR
Click the GPS button
on the toolbar.
Notes
•
The GPS and NavMode toolbar buttons are hidden by default. To show them, right-click
the toolbar and click GPS/NavMode.
•
The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control Panel
when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected.
•
If you deactivate the Center on GPS button, you can continue to manually pan the map
or use the search function in the Find tab.
•
When you are done with other tasks, click Center on GPS in the Control Panel to
resume tracking.
Playing Back a Log File
After you log a route with your GPS receiver, you can play it back in the mapping
application and review your entire journey on-screen.
Your log will play back in NavMode unless you have it turned off. For more information, see
Using NavMode or Tab View.
Notes
•
You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS receiver.
•
Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail.
•
When you play back a log file in NavMode, the tab area is not minimized; this allows
you to control the playback.
To Play Back a Log File
Use the following steps to play back and review a log file.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
243
Topo USA User Guide
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start time,
start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time, finish
coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log. Log files have .gpl
extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
5. Click Open.
6. Click the Play button
to begin playing back your log.
OR
Drag the slider in the Progress Bar (see graphic at the end of this topic) to the
point in the log you want to play.
Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x, which occurs in real time and takes the
same amount of time as the original trip did; for example, if your trip took six hours,
the on-screen tracking process also takes six hours.
You can also:
•
From the Playback Speed drop-down list, select an option (2x, 5x, 10x, 25x,
or 50x) to increase the tracking speed accordingly.
•
Click the Pause button
to pause the tracking of the log file. The Pause
button turns blue to indicate the file is paused. Click the Play button to continue
playing back the file.
•
Click the Stop button
to stop the play back. To start the file over, click
the Play button again.
•
Click and hold the Rewind button
to rewind the log file to a particular
point.
•
Click and hold the Forward button
to fast forward the log file to a
particular point.
•
Drag the slider in the Progress Bar to view a particular point in the log. You can
drag the slider forward or backward.
Previewing a GPS Log File
244
Using GPS
There are two ways to view an existing GPS log. You can play it back and watch it in real
time (point-by-point), or you can preview it and view the entire log area without waiting for
the playback to finish.
To Preview a Log File
Use the following steps to preview a log file.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start time,
start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time, finish
coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log.
5. Click Open.
6. Click File and then click File Preview.
The map centers on your log location.
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log
If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you've been on the
map, the File Details option in the GPS Log subtab can give you a variety of information
about your journey.
For even more specific information about your log, simply play back or preview your log and
then right-click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time the point was
obtained as well as the speed, bearing, elevation, and GPS status for that particular point.
To View File Details for a GPS Log
Use the following steps to view log file details.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open.
5. Click File and then click File Details.
A dialog box shows information about your log.
6. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
245
Topo USA User Guide
Monitoring Your GPS Status
Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking, you can continue to monitor the status of
your GPS connection and other information. Status information accuracy is affected by
speed (3 mph or more) and your GPS status. 3-D status provides the most accurate
information.
To Monitor Your GPS Status in GPS Tab View
Speed and Heading
Speed–Displays the speed you are traveling
based on the units you selected on the Display
tab in the Options dialog box.
Heading–Displays the direction you are traveling
as degrees T (True North) or M (Magnetic North)
based on the bearing selected on the Units area
on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Heading is provided as a numerical value as well
as a compass direction.
Coordinates/Elevation
Coordinates–The coordinate fields display based on the units you selected
on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Elevation–Displays the current elevation if the GPS status is 3-D and is
based on the selected Units preference. Elevation can be displayed with a
2-D status; your position is indicated accurately on your screen as you
travel unless you are in an area where your elevation varies greatly.
GPS Status
No GPS–A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not yet
detected by your computer. This status usually displays when initialization first
begins.
Acquiring–A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet receiving
sufficient satellite data to determine your position. This status displays while
the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and can take several minutes.
246
Using GPS
2-D–A yellow circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but there is
insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position. This usually
indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due to:
•
Only three satellites being used
•
Poor signals from the satellites.
Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception.
3-D–A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite
data to determine your location. When the status reads 3-D, your current
coordinates, elevation, and heading are displayed, along with the speed you
are currently traveling.
Note If you are tracking with a WAAS-enabled device, a 3-D fix displays as
"3-D DGPS."
To Monitor Your GPS Status in NavMode
In NavMode, you can view your speed. To view other GPS status information, use the tab
view.
Speed
Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you selected on
the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information
Click Sat. Info in the GPS tab to view the current satellite status. Sat. Info is a toggle
button that switches to Status. Click Status to return to the original Status dialog area.
Dilution of Precision
The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of Precision,
your Horizontal Dilution of Precision, and your Vertical Dilution of
Precision. For definitions of these terms, see the Glossary Terms.
Satellite Listing
247
Topo USA User Guide
The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are currently
visible in the sky. The columns list the satellite number, elevation,
azimuth, and signal-to-noise ratio.
Satellite Listing information is only available for DeLorme receivers and
NMEA-compatible receivers.
Almanac
When using a DeLorme GPS receiver, the Almanac window displays the
satellite number and its current status.
N–Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation.
E–Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite.
T–Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your GPS
receiver.
D–Indicates differential data is available for that satellite.
Notes
•
Differential data is available on WAAS-enabled devices.
•
Almanac information is available only for DeLorme receivers.
Skyview
The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites, their number (assigned by
the Department of Defense), and their position in the sky relative to your
current position. Each satellite is color coded, based on the quality of data
it is transmitting.
Gray–Indicates the satellite's position in the sky.
Red–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is not
receiving data from it.
Yellow–(DeLorme GPS receivers only) Indicates your receiver is tracking
the satellite, ephemeris data is available, but the satellite is not being used
for navigation.
Green–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite, ephemeris data
is available, and the satellite is being used for navigation.
Dark Green–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates your receiver is
tracking the satellite, ephemeris data is available, the satellite is being used
248
Using GPS
for navigation, and the satellite has DGPS and WAAS corrections available.
Blue–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates a WAAS satellite used for
corrections.
Viewing Sun and Moon Information
You can use the Sun/Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the rising and
setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date, time, and location.
To View Sun and Moon Information
Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab.
1. Click the GPS tab.
2. Click the Sun/Moon subtab.
3. Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date.
4. Use the scroll arrows to change the time.
5. After you update the date and time, you can view:
•
The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with the
Sun/Moon compass. In the center of the compass, a shadow grows and
shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the compass (similar
to a sun dial).
•
Sun rise/set and Moon rise/set information.
•
Moon cycle information (such as the day of the moon cycle and the phase).
About GPS
What is GPS?
The Global Positioning System (GPS) applies modern technology to the ancient basics of
navigation. The U.S. Department of Defense has developed and launched a series of
positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation. These satellites are used as reference
points much the same way stars have been used in conventional navigation.
Using these satellites, a GPS receiver can determine your position anywhere on the globe.
GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position, elevation, speed, and
direction of travel. Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for tracking vehicles,
recording routes, and much more.
How Does GPS Work?
249
Topo USA User Guide
The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites, each carrying several atomic clocks to ensure
the most accurate time possible. The satellites broadcast low-power radio waves containing
the satellite's identity code and the exact time (to the nanosecond) that the message was
sent.
When a GPS receiver picks up a satellite signal, it identifies the satellite and compares the
signal time with its own clock. The time difference represents the time it has taken for that
radio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver. Since radio waves travel at the speed
of light, the time difference can be used to calculate the distance from the satellite to the
GPS receiver.
The satellite's identity code provides the location of the satellite, and the distance to the
receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver. Without more
information, the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that sphere.
Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver's possible position. Each
of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and identity information.
The GPS receiver checks the orbital location of each satellite and uses the elapsed time to
create two additional spheres of possible locations. These three spheres intersect at two
points; however, one of these points is eliminated because it is far away from the earth's
surface. Therefore, the second point is assumed to be correct. The data from these three
satellites provides the receiver with a two-dimensional location.
Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver's exact location. This additional
positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation, which is
particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations.
GPS Position Accuracy
The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many factors,
including the quality of your equipment. A low-quality clock within the receiver decreases
the accuracy of your location. The atmosphere, the ionosphere, and the number of channels
your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your system. Consult your GPS hardware
manuals for information on how your receiver adjusts for errors.
Any buildings, natural structures, or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna's view of
the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the accuracy of
your position.
Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U.S. Department of
Defense. There are two available radio signals that receivers can use: the Standard
250
Using GPS
Positioning Service (SPS) for civilians and the Precise Positioning Service (PPS) for military
and authorized personnel.
251
Using Voice Navigation
Voice Overview
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Using the speech recognition and text-to-speech technology included in your application,
you can issue a series of voice commands to a laptop computer. The voice commands
activate basic navigation, map control, and GPS features, providing you with hands-free
program navigation so you can concentrate on your driving. When tracking with a GPS
receiver, you can receive spoken updates about your route directions, next turn, next stop,
current location, etc.
Notes
•
The Voice label on the Voice tab displays red when the microphone is activated.
•
Your application comes equipped with Microsoft® English Recognizer Version 5.1.
You can also use other speech recognition engines that you may have purchased
separately from other software companies. Such speech recognition engines must
support SAPI 5.1 to be available to you in your application. See the Speech
settings in the Windows Control Panel for more information about your engine.
•
If you have purchased other voices (text-to-speech engines) that are SAPI 5.1compatible, they are available in your application.
•
You must have a microphone attached to your computer to use speech
recognition (for input).
•
For tips on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone,
see Speech Recognition Tips.
•
If you are having difficulty hearing the voice output, adjust the volume on your
external speakers or adjust your computer's volume using the settings in the
Windows® Control Panel.
•
If you chose the custom installation option when you installed your application,
you were asked whether or not to install a speech recognition engine for voice
input. If you want to use voice input and selected not to install a speech
253
Topo USA User Guide
recognition engine when you installed the program, you must uninstall and then
reinstall the application, making sure to select to install the speech recognition
engine.
•
The speech recognition engine is automatically installed on Windows Vista
and Windows 7 operating systems.
•
If you have another DeLorme product installed and already opted to install
the speech recognition engine, you may not see the option to install it
again.
Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D
GPS fix and a route calculated.
Use the Voice tab to view status information about your microphone and the list of available
voice commands.
•
The Microphone bar (VU meter) indicates the level of sound received from the
microphone.
•
The Command Status area displays either the last recognized voice command or one
of the following error messages:
•
•
•
Too noisy
•
No signal
•
Input too loud
•
Input too quiet
The Commands box lists the voice commands for accessing the Voice tab,
navigating, using the map, and using GPS. It shows the availability of the commands
and their shortcut keys. You can double-click a command to issue it.
To Activate and Monitor the Speech Recognition Feature
Use the following steps to activate and monitor the speech recognition feature.
1. Click the Voice tab.
254
Using Voice Navigation
2. Select the Microphone check box to activate your microphone and to turn on the
speech recognition feature.
The tab name turns red if the microphone is listening to your commands.
Note If your microphone is active when you exit the program, it will still be active
when you re-enter the application.
3. To trigger an audible signal when a voice command is recognized, select the Beep
When Heard check box.
4. To display all of the possible voice commands, including variations of the commands,
select the Show All Commands check box.
Both enabled
and disabled
commands are displayed.
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS is not
initialized.
Voice Commands
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Your application includes Route, Map, GPS, and Voice tab control commands. Select the
Show All Commands check box to view all options, including those which are variations or
unavailable.
Route Tab Commands
The following table shows navigation voice commands for the Route tab. If there is a
keyboard shortcut available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
Response
What is the next turn?
Speaks the next turn name, time to turn, distance to turn,
(F5)
bearing to turn, and turn direction. Displays the Directions
What's the next turn?
subtab in the Route tab.
(F5)
Next turn. (F5)
Show next turn. (F6)
Displays current location and next turn. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.
255
Topo USA User Guide
Center on next turn.
Centers map on the next turn. Displays the Directions subtab
in the Route tab.
What is the next stop?
What's the next stop?
Speaks the next stop name, distance to stop, bearing to stop,
and time to stop. Displays the Directions subtab in the Route
tab.
Next stop
Show next stop. (F7)
Displays current location and next stop. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Center on next stop.
Centers map on the next stop. Displays the Directions subtab
in the Route tab.
After that.
Speaks the next stop or turn information, depending on the
previous spoken direction.
Are we there yet?
Speaks the finish name, time to finish, and distance to finish.
Show finish. (F8)
Displays current location and finish on the map.
Center on finish.
Centers map on the finish. Displays the Directions subtab in
the Route tab.
Directions.
Speaks the next turn, next stop, finish, name, time, and
distance. Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Where am I?
Speaks current route segment, heading, speed, town, county,
and state.
Coordinates.
Speaks the coordinate of your current location.
Shush. (F4)
Silences GPS voice navigation, but does not turn it off.
Be quiet. (F4)
Voice nav on. (F2)
Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) on.
Voice nav off. (F2)
Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) off.
Show route.
Displays your route on the map.
Back on track.
Adds current GPS location as a stop and recalculates the
route.
256
Using Voice Navigation
Continue route from here.
Adds current location as a stop and recalculates the route.
(F9)
Show turns.
Activates the Show Turns dialog area in the Route tab.
Show directions.
Activates the Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Show list.
Map Commands
The following table shows main map voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut
available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
Response
Pan left. (ALT+Left)
Pans (or scrolls) the map left.
Scroll left. (ALT+Left)
Pan right. (ALT+Right)
Pans (or scrolls) the map right.
Scroll right. (ALT+Right)
Pan up. (ALT+UP)
Pans (or scrolls) the map up.
Scroll up. (ALT+UP)
Pan down. (ALT+DOWN)
Pans (or scrolls) the map down.
Scroll down. (ALT+DOWN)
Zoom in. (ALT+PAGE
Zooms in one level.
DOWN)
Zoom out. (ALT+PAGE
Zooms out one level.
UP)
Zoom in <#> times.
Zooms in the specified number of levels.
Zoom out <#> times.
Zooms out the specified number of levels.
Zoom level <#>.
Zooms to specified level.
Previous map.
Displays the previous map.
Go back.
257
Topo USA User Guide
GPS Tab Commands
The following table shows GPS voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut available, it
is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
Response
Start GPS. (CTRL+G)
Starts GPS tracking.
Stop GPS. (CTRL+G)
Stops GPS tracking.
GPS status.
Displays the GPS Status subtab.
Monitor GPS.
Displays the GPS Monitor subtab.
GPS Monitor.
Center on GPS. (ALT+P)
Recenters the map on the current GPS location.
Stop centering on GPS.
Stops the map from recentering on your current GPS
(ALT+P)
location.
Stop center on GPS.
(ALT+P)
Clear GPS.
Clears the GPS "bread crumb trail" from the map.
Autorotate map on.
Turns automatic map rotation on.
(ALT+R)
Autorotate map off.
Turns automatic map rotation off.
(ALT+R)
Autozoom map on.
When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom on.
(ALT+Z)
Autozoom map off.
When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom off.
(ALT+Z)
Voice Tab Commands
The following table shows Voice tab voice commands and the response.
Spoken Command
Response
What can I say?
Displays the Monitor dialog box.
258
Using Voice Navigation
More commands.
Displays next page of voice commands.
Repeat last command.
Repeats your last spoken command.
Voice Prompts
Directions (spoken first or alone)
Proceed…
Continue straight...
Bear right…
Bear left…
Turn right…
Turn left…
Turn hard right…
Turn hard left…
Go east…
Go west…
Go north…
Go northeast…
Go northwest…
Go south…
Go southeast…
Go southwest…
Direction distance modifiers (spoken second)
…in [distance in tenths of a mile]
Other (spoken alone)
At finish. [was: “Destination reached.”]
Last leg.
Approaching finish.
Off route.
Voice Options
259
Topo USA User Guide
Voice Options
Click a link to learn more about the Voice tab in the Options dialog box:
•
Training the Speech Recognition Engine
•
Speech Recognition Tips
•
Changing Voice Output
•
Voice Preferences
Training the Speech Recognition Engine
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
You should train the speech recognition engine to provide good speech recognition results.
Before training, ensure your microphone is active and the speech recognition feature is on.
For more information, see Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition.
To Train the Engine to Recognize Your Speech Patterns
You should train the speech recognition engine to recognize your specific speech patterns.
This is often done by reading a predetermined piece of text supplied by the creator of the
speech recognition engine. If the engine supports multiple user models, you can train the
engine to recognize more than one speech pattern.
Use the following steps to train the speech recognition engine to recognize your speech
patterns.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options.
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. Select the microphone you intend to use from the Microphone drop-down list.
4. Select your preferred user voice model from the User Profile drop-down list.
Note To create a new speech recognition profile for each of your working
environments (noisy, quiet) and users (your spouse, your child), click Speech in the
Windows Control Panel.
260
Using Voice Navigation
5. Select your preferred speech recognition engine from the Recognizer drop-down
list.
Note Select the most recent version available in the drop-down list.
6. Click Speech Profile Training to display the speech training wizard specific to your
speech recognition engine.
Note This feature is available only if it is supported by your speech recognition
engine.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Tips
For best results:
•
Use a close-talk microphone that rests near the side of your mouth instead of a
desktop or built-in microphone.
•
Train the speech recognition engine in the same environment in which you will use it.
For example, if you use the engine mostly in the car, perform training in the car.
Perform three training sessions to get the best results.
•
When training, speak the same voice as you will when giving voice commands to the
computer. Speak distinctly and at an average speed, as if giving a command.
•
Use the Microphone Wizard to ensure your microphone is working correctly and to
view tips on microphone selection and placement. To use the wizard, click
Microphone Setup on the Voice tab of the Options dialog. Or, from the Start menu
on your computer, browse to the Control Panel and double-click the Speech icon to
open the Speech Properties dialog box.
•
To increase the likelihood of correct speech recognition, on the Voice Settings tab in
the Options dialog box, select the Commands start with check box and then type
the appropriate word/phrase in the text box (if using a single word, use a word with
more than one syllable). For example, if you type computer, you would then say
"Computer, zoom in."
Speech Recognition Tips
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
261
Topo USA User Guide
The following tips provide information on using the speech recognition feature and setting
up your microphone.
•
Speech recognition is only active when your application is the active window.
•
Commands become enabled based on your current GPS status, your data zoom level,
and other factors. Enabled commands do not have a red "x" on the icon.
•
Disabled commands have a red "x" on the icon.
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS has not
been initialized.
•
Avoid noisy environments when using voice command navigation.
•
Use a close-talk microphone for best speech recognition results.
•
Properly position your microphone to achieve the best speech recognition results. For
a close-talk microphone, the recommended position is a thumb-width from the
corner of your mouth and slightly to the side. For more information, see the note at
the end of this topic.
•
When issuing commands to the computer, use the same tone that was used when
during the speech recognition engine training.
•
Keep the microphone as far as possible from the car radio or console, computer
speakers, or other speakers.
•
If your microphone is near your speakers, and you are using the microphone
together with voice reminders (GPS VoiceNav), the program may recognize some of
the words that it is speaking and react to them. Here are ways to eliminate this
problem:
•
Make sure that you have chosen the Voice Output device (speakers, headset)
and the Input device (on-board microphone, headset microphone) that you
intend to use with DeLorme GPS voice navigation. Use the selections that are
available in the Voice settings tab in the Options dialog box.
•
If more than one speech recognizer is available in the drop-down list, choose
the most recent (highest version number).
•
Your best speech recognition responses will always be to use a close-talk
microphone with voice output using the laptop speakers rather than a
headphone speaker so that the computer will not "hear itself."
•
If you are speaking with someone else in the room, have a radio or television
on, and so on, the computer may think those sounds are commands to follow.
262
Using Voice Navigation
Select the Microphone check box on the Voice tab only when you intend to
use it. If you exit the program with the Microphone check box selected, the
program will start speech recognition again when you restart the program.
Voice recognition requires a lot of disk space and slows down the system if
you are not using it. Remember: the Voice tab displays with red font
whenever the microphone is listening.
•
Use the Commands Start With feature in the Voice tab in the Options dialog
to clearly distinguish commands from other noise and speech. Set the
Commands Start With phrase to something like “computer” or “Simon Says”
to reduce the chances of an unexpected command recognition. When
choosing a phrase, make sure that it is more than one syllable. The phrases
"computer" or "Simon Says" work well. But the simple word "map" probably
will not.
•
Train the speech recognition system in the environment in which you will use
it (for example, in a noisy car).
Note To find out the proper position for your microphone model, or to find tips on how to
purchase a microphone, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the
arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options to open
the dialog box), click the Voice Settings tab, and then click Microphone Setup. Or, from
the Start menu on your computer, browse to the Control Panel and double-click the Speech
icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box.
Changing Voice Output
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Your application offers text-to-speech technology so you can receive spoken updates about
your route directions, next turn, next stop, current location, time to finish, or current
coordinates when navigating with a GPS receiver. Text-to-speech allows hands-free
navigation of the program on your computer.
Use your text-to-speech engine to change and preview the tone and quality of the
computer's voice.
To Change the Voice Output
263
Topo USA User Guide
Use the following steps to change your computer's voice.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. From the Voice drop-down list box, select a voice from the list of options.
A description of the selected voice displays to the right of the drop-down list box.
Note If you have purchased SAPI 5.1-compatible voices from another software
vendor, they are included in this list.
4. From the Device drop-down list box, select the output device from which you want
to hear the computer's voice (for example, your speakers or a headset).
5. To preview the voice, click Test Voice, type a sample sentence, and then click OK.
The sample sentence is spoken in the selected voice.
6. Use the Voice Volume spin box to adjust the output volume relative to the other
programs you are running. By default, this is set to 100 (maximum). Note that you
cannot set the volume higher than your speakers or Windows Control Panel settings
capabilities.
Note Click Audio Controls to access additional volume settings.
7. Use the Speaking Rate spin box to adjust the rate at which the computer's voice
will speak. A value of 50 is normal.
Voice Preferences
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
The Voice tab in the Options dialog displays a series of Engine Option buttons. These option
buttons allow you to view information or change preference settings in your speech
recognition or text-to-speech engines. Some speech recognition or text-to-speech engines
do not support some of the preference options.
To View and Update Speech Recognition Preferences
264
Using Voice Navigation
To change speech input preferences, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or
click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options
to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab. The following options are
available under the Speech Recognition area of the dialog box.
•
Microphone Setup–Opens the Microphone Wizard to adjust speech recognition
whenever you change microphone or noise environments.
•
Speech Profile Training–Opens Voice Training Wizard to train the engine to
recognize your speech patterns. This process may take 10–15 minutes to complete.
•
DeLorme Training–Opens an abbreviated version of the Voice Training Wizard. This
dialog trains the system on DeLorme voice commands.
•
Add/Delete Words–Opens the Add/Delete Words Wizard with the pronunciation
wizard specific to your speech recognition engine. You can enter, edit, or view the
words in your pronunciation vocabulary. Use this wizard when the speech recognition
has trouble understanding a specific word that you are saying.
•
Recognition Settings–Opens the Recognition Profile Settings dialog. Use this to
change preferences for sensitivity and tolerance of errors in recognizing your voice.
Note Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version
5.1. You may have a premium version (for example, Microsoft Office 2003 installs
Microsoft English U.S. Version 6.1 Recognizer). Select the most recent version.
To View and Update Voice Output Preferences
To change voice output preferences, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or
click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options
to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab. The following options are
available under the Voice Output area of the dialog box.
•
Test Voice–Choose to display the preview voice dialog box for your text-to-speech
engine. Type in a sentence and click OK to hear it spoken.
•
Audio Controls–Choose to adjust the speaker volume for all programs on your
computer. This is equivalent to the same adjustment in the Windows Control Panel.
265
Geocaching
Geocaching Menu
Click Geocaching on the Map Files tab to view the Geocaching menu.
Geocaching.com Log In
You must have an premium account at Geocaching.com to create pocket queries. Logging in
through the Geocaching menu allows DeLorme Topo North America and Geocaching.com to
connect for sending information back and forth. It does not log you in to the
Geocaching.com website.
1. Click Log In to open the Log In dialog box.
2. Type your user name and password in the boxes.
3. Select the Remember my log in check box to save your log in information.
Manage Pocket Queries
See Managing Pocket Queries for more information about creating, editing, and updating
pocket queries.
Upload Field Notes
Upload field notes to Geocaching.com when you sync your PN-Series GPS with DeLorme
Topo North America.
•
To automatically upload field notes to Geocaching.com when you sync your device:
•
You must be logged in to your Geocaching.com premium account through the
Geocaching menu.
•
The Upload Field Notes check box on the Geocaching menu must be selected.
267
Topo USA User Guide
•
After you sync your device, go to your field notes on Geocaching.com to complete
posting them.
•
If you are not logged in or if the Upload Field Notes check box is not selected, you
can manually upload field notes through the Geocaching.com website after you sync
your device.
•
The field note file is saved to DeLorme Docs/Draw/PN-Series on your computer. If
you are logged in and the Upload Field Notes check box is selected, the file is deleted
once it is uploaded.
Geocaching Overview
Geocaching is a fun outdoor activity that uses a GPS device for treasure hunting.
Geocaching is enjoyed by all kinds of people—from families with small children to active
outdoor adventurers. To search for a geocache, you use a GPS device to follow clues to
caches hidden by other geocachers. On your device and in DeLorme Topo North America, a
geocache is a type of waypoint.
DeLorme Topo North America has several features to help you get your caches on your
device and start geocaching.
For more information about geocaching, visit Geocaching.com.
Map Files Tab—Geocaching Menu
Manage Geocaching.com pocket queries from within DeLorme Topo North America. You can
also set an option to automatically upload field notes on your PN-Series GPS device to
Geocacaching.com after you sync it with DeLorme Topo North America.
Earthmate GPS Sync
Use Earthmate GPS Sync to synchronize your Earthmate PN-Series GPS device with
DeLorme Topo North America. Sync geocaches, waypoints, tracks, routes, and maps.
Draw Tab
Use the import file option in the Draw tab to import geocache files. The files are converted
to draw files for use in DeLorme Topo North America.
•
Geocaching.com Location (.loc) files. These files contain the cache code, cache
name, and the latitude and longitude for the cache location.
•
GPS Exchange (.gpx) files have full cache descriptions and hints that you can view in
the Waypoint comment field.
268
Geocaching
Managing Pocket Queries
If you have a premium membership for Geocaching.com, you can create custom geocache
files (in .gpx) format called pocket queries on the Geocaching.com website. When you
download a pocket query it creates waypoint layer on the Draw tab.
You can manage your pocket queries from within DeLorme Topo North America and quickly
sync them with your PN-Series GPS.
Create a New Pocket Query
1. On the Map Files tab, click Geocaching, and then click New Pocket Query. The
Geocaching.com website opens on the New Pocket Query page.
2. Log in to the website and create a pocket query.
Edit a Pocket Query
You must be logged in through Topo North America to view and edit a pocket query.
1. On the Map Files tab, click the pocket query you want to edit.
2. Click Geocaching and then click Edit Pocket Query. The Geocaching.com website
opens on the page for your pocket query.
3. Log in to the website and edit your pocket query.
Update Pocket Queries
You must be logged in through Topo North America to update a pocket query.
On the Map Files tab, click Geocaching and then click Update. The Geocaching Pocket
Queries list in the map files list updates.
Auto-update Pocket Queries
If you want pocket queries to automatically update, click Auto Update on the Geocaching
menu to select the check box. As long as you are logged in, pocket queries will update
automatically when you open Topo North America.
269
Topo USA User Guide
Pocket Queries and Draw Layers
When you download a pocket query, it creates a geocache waypoint
layer on the Draw tab. These draw layers have some characteristics that
make them different from regular waypoint draw layers:
•
They are updated each time you update a pocket query.
•
They are locked and cannot be edited. You can copy a layer or
elements of a layer to a new layer.
•
In the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog, layers created from pocket
queries are found in the Geocache Files category. After sync, they
appear on your device as .gpx files.
•
When you sync your device with Topo North America after you
finish geocaching and log finds or make changes, a new draw
layer is created that includes your updates—the new file has
"Changes" at the end of the name. This way, your original pocket
query layer is kept for your next update and you can work on
your desktop or on your device the Changes file.
•
When you update a pocket query, it is added to the open project
in Topo North America and it is updated in any project you have
previously added it to.
270
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
PN-Series GPS Overview
This section of the Help explains how to use DeLorme Topo North America with your
Earthmate PN-Series GPS device (PN-30 and higher models). For help with using the device,
see your User Manual.
Syncing Maps and Data
Sync Overview
You can use Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box to sync waypoints, tracks, routes, and maps in
DeLorme Topo North America with an Earthmate PN-Series GPS device (PN-30 and later
models).
Click the Sync button
on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box. You
can also open the Sync dialog box by clicking the Sync button on the Handheld Export tab
or the GPS tab.
See the following Help topics for more info about syncing.
•
Syncing Maps, Points, Routes, and Tracks
•
Tutorial: Add a Map to a PN-Series GPS
•
Tutorial: Sync Data with a PN-Series GPS
•
Deleting Files from a PN-Series GPS
271
Topo USA User Guide
Syncing Maps, Points, Routes, and Tracks
Use Earthmate GPS Sync to sync your DeLorme Topo North America projects with your
Earthmate PN-Series GPS device or an SD card you plan to use in your device.
Before you start, set your preferences for using Earthmate GPS Sync.
See the tutorials to learn more about using Earthmate GPS Sync:
•
Tutorial: Add a Map to a PN-Series GPS
•
Tutorial: Sync Data with a PN-Series GPS
When you open Earthmate GPS Sync, you can see a summary of the project open in Topo
North America on the left side of the dialog box. On the right side of the dialog box, you see
a summary of the device connected to your computer with a USB cable or an SD card in a
reader in your computer. To change the view on the right side of the dialog box, click the
arrow in the top right corner and select the device or SD card to view.
View Project or GPS/SD Card Contents
Click Project Contents, GPS Contents, or SD Card Contents to view a summary of the
waypoints, geocaches, tracks, routes, and maps on your desktop and on the connected
device/SD card. When a category contains files, the number of files is indicated and an
arrow displays. Click the category to view the list of contents.
•
Project Contents include:
•
272
Routes, tracks, waypoints, and geocaches from the open project.
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
•
Map files that you have downloaded from the NetLink Map Library
Note Only maps in the DeLorme Docs/Mobile Maps folder on your computer
are displayed.
•
GPS/SD Card Contents include:
•
All maps and files that you have synced to or installed on the device's internal
drive or SD card.
•
Any data you have collected on your device.
Make Changes
You can change what will sync and where it will sync to. Each layer, file, route, or map can
be individually controlled.
•
To exclude something from syncing, clear its check box.
•
To change the location for the file after sync, click the toggle
in the Select
Destination column. The selected location is blue.
•
The toggle on the project side indicates where you are sending the file to—
select GPS for the device's internal drive. Select SD for an SD card in the
device.
•
The toggle on the GPS side allows you to move a file, layer, or map. For
example, if you have a waypoint file on your device's internal drive, you
might want to move it to the SD card.
273
Topo USA User Guide
•
If an option is grayed out, it is unavailable for that data.
View Available Memory
The Memory Preview area shows the approximate amount of memory that will be available
on your device and SD card after you sync. This can help you make decisions about where
to sync your data.
Sync
When you sync, only files you have selected on either side are included.
•
Click Sync to sync new files and changes to existing files at the same time.
•
To ONLY send new files and changes to existing files from Topo North America to the
device or SD card, click the arrow next to the Sync button and select Send. Then
click Send.
•
To ONLY receive new files or changes to existing files from the device or SD card into
Topo North America, click the arrow next to the Sync button and select Receive.
Then, click Receive.
Once the sync has finished, you are notified that the sync is complete.
Tutorial: Add a Map to an Earthmate PN-Series GPS
Map Library Imagery and Data
•
Download imagery and data to layer over the device's topographic and street maps.
•
Use Earthmate GPS Sync to send a downloaded map package to your device or an
SD card.
274
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
Note You can create a custom map package if you want to control the zoom levels
at which the map displays or include draw layers.
•
Click the Help button
on the Map Library subtab to access the online NetLink
Help.
Step 1—Activate your certificate or subscription
If you already have an active subscription, go to step 2.
1. Click the NetLink tab OR click the Map Library button
in the toolbar.
2. Type the download certificate or subscription key in the Validation Key box to
activate it.
Step 2—Select the coverage area and submit your selection
1. From the drop-down list, select the data type you want to download.
2. Click the Select button
and then click each grid on the map, or click and
hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor on the map to quickly select multiple
grids.
3. When you have finished selecting grids, click Submit
275
Topo USA User Guide
Step 3—Name your selection and process the order
On the next screen, type a name for your selection. This is the name you want for your map
file. Then, click Process Order.
Step 4—Download your imagery or data
276
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
You will be notified by email when the download is ready. You can also check the download
progress on the Downloads subtab.
When your file is ready, go to the Downloads subtab and download your map files.
Note For each selection, a map file for your PN-Series GPS device is saved to the DeLorme
Docs/Mobile Maps folder on your computer and a map file for use in the desktop mapping
program is saved to the DeLorme Docs/Downloads folder.
Step 5—Sync the project with your PN-Series GPS
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable. If syncing with an SD
card, you can insert the card in the device or use an SD card reader.
2. Click the Sync button
on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog
box.
3. To verify your downloaded map is ready to sync, on the left side of the dialog click
Project Contents. Then, click Map Packages. You can view the maps you already
have on the device on the right side of the dialog.
Step 6—View the imagery on the device
277
Topo USA User Guide
Disconnect your device from your computer. On the device, go to Map > MENU > Data
Management. Then, highlight the map file, press MENU and select View Map.
Tutorial: Sync Data with a PN-Series GPS
Use Earthmate GPS Sync to send and receive waypoints, including geocaches, tracks, and
routes to and from an Earthmate PN-Series GPS. When planning a trip, use DeLorme Topo
North America to create a set of waypoints, a track, and a route that identify the locations
you are interested in visiting.
•
See Syncing Maps, Points, Routes, and Tracks for more information about syncing.
•
See the Add a Map to a PN-Series GPS tutorial for more information about adding
maps and imagery and syncing them.
For this tutorial, we are transferring data to a PN-60w connected to the computer.
Step 1—Create your trip information
Use DeLorme Topo North America to create your trip information. To easily manage your
information, create a new project for each trip.
For more information, see the following Help topics:
•
Creating a Route
•
Adding Waypoints to the Map
•
Geocaching Overview
•
Drawing a Track on the Map
Step 2—Connect your device to your computer
Connect the device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on. Then, click the
Sync button
•
278
on the toolbar.
The connected device displays on the right of the dialog box.
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
•
The left side of the dialog box shows the project that you have open on your
computer.
Step 3—View what will sync
To view the contents of the project, click Project Contents. To view what is on the
device/SD card, click GPS Contents. To view a detailed list for a category with contents,
click it.
279
Topo USA User Guide
Step 4—Make changes
•
To include or exclude a specific file, layer, or map, select or clear its check box.
•
To change the location for the file after sync, click the toggle
in the Select
Destination column. The selected location is blue.
•
The toggle on the project side indicates where you are sending the file to—
select GPS for the device's internal drive. Select SD for an SD card in the
device.
•
The toggle on the GPS side allows you to move a file, layer, or map. For
example, if you have a waypoint file on your devices' internal drive, you
might want to move it to the SD card.
•
280
If an option is grayed out, it is unavailable for that data.
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
Step 5—Sync
Click Sync on the dialog box. You are notified when sync is complete.
281
Topo USA User Guide
Deleting Files from a PN-Series GPS
You can use Earthmate GPS Sync to delete maps, routes, tracks, waypoints, and geocaches
from your Earthmate PN-Series GPS or an SD card in an SD card reader.
1. Connect your device or SD card reader to your computer.
2. Click the Sync button on the toolbar to open the Earthmate GPS Sync dialog box.
3. On the right (device/SD card) side of the dialog box, click GPS Contents and then
click the category for the file you want to delete to display the files on the device/SD
card.
The last column shows the file location.
4. Select the red X outline for each file to delete.
A solid red X indicates a file is selected for deletion; the check box for the file is
cleared so it isn't copied to Topo North America.
5. Click Sync on the dialog box. The sync process removes the files selected for
deletion from the device or SD card.
Sync Options
Set your preferences for working with Earthmate GPS Sync when an Earthmate PN-Series
GPS device is connected to your computer with a USB cable.
Click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the Sync tab.
282
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
•
Select the Open Earthmate GPS Sync check box to open the Earthmate GPS Sync
dialog box when you connect your device to your computer.
•
Select the Automatically start Sync when Earthmate GPS Sync is opened
check box to start the sync process as soon as you open the dialog box.
Firmware Updates
Occasionally, DeLorme releases updates for Earthmate PN-Series GPS devices. When an
update is available for a device connected to your computer with the USB cable, you will be
notified when you start Earthmate GPS Sync. An Internet connection is required for
firmware update notification and download.
283
Topo USA User Guide
Creating Custom Map Packages
Creating a Custom Map Package
You can export maps that you create in DeLorme Topo North America to use on a DeLorme
Earthmate PN-Series GPS device. You can customize (Custom map packages are created
using the Handheld Export tab. The data that is included in a custom map package depends
on the data that is available for the export area.) your map with imagery and data from
NetLink's Map Library and draw layers. For more information about data types, see the Data
and Zoom Level Information box below.
To Create a Map Package
Use the following steps to create a custom map to send to an Earthmate PN-Series GPS.
1. Click the Handheld Export tab.
2. Under the select layers list, select the check box next to each layer to include in the
map package. For information about layers, click a data type in the Data and Zoom
Level Information box below.
Tips
•
If you installed the PN-Series detailed DVD data on your device, clear the
Topo North America Data Series check box so you do not duplicate data.
•
You can select multiple layers and then click one check box to select or clear
the check boxes for all selected items.
3. To change the maximum and minium zoom levels for the data, click the cell under
Min or Max and type the new number. Click the arrow next to the range in the table
to open a dialog with more zoom controls. For more information about zoom levels,
see the Data and Zoom Level Information box below.
4. Select an appropriate grid size from the Grid Size drop-down list (for more
information, see Grid Size Comparisons), click the Select/Edit
button,
and click grids on the map to add or remove them. Grids selected for export are
shaded red. You can click and drag to quickly select multiple grids. If you used the
Preview in Handheld feature on the Find tab to preview a layer, you can click the
Select All
button to select the default export area for the layer.
5. Type a name for your map package in the Enter map package name box.
6. Click Save
.
When you sync your project, the map package will be sent to your device.
284
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
Notes
•
To clear the highlighted grids from the map, click the Clear All button
•
To view a previously exported map, select it from the Saved Map Packages list and
then click View
•
To delete a previously exported map, select it from the Saved Map Packages list
and then click Delete
•
Vector data (points, lines, polygons) may look slightly different in the software than
on the device.
•
•
Lines
•
Blazed Trail
•
Sewer Line
•
Water Line
•
Drain Line
•
Gas Line
•
Electric Line
•
Telephone Line
•
Ticked Fence
•
Post and Rail Fence
•
Barbed Wire Fence
•
Guard Rail
•
Stone Wall
•
Vegetation Line
•
Completed Dozer Line
•
Line Break Completed
•
Highlighted Geographic Feature
•
Man Made Feature
•
Uncontrolled Fire Edge
•
Fire Break Incomplete
•
Directional Arrow
Polygons
•
Wetlands
285
Topo USA User Guide
•
•
Bare Ground
•
Rock, Lake or Pond
•
Island
•
Land
•
Mixed Forest
•
Evergreen Forest
Points
•
Only Earthmate PN-Series point symbols are supported on PN-Series
GPS devices. If you use other symbols, they will be changed to PN
symbols for display on the device.
Data and Zoom Level Information
IMPORTANT The data types listed may not exist in your project. The data shown in the
list is determined by the data you have connected on the Map Files tab.
Click a data type below for more information. The optimum data zoom level ranges
•
for each raster data type is provided:
o
Draw Layers — 1-17
All draw layers in the current project, excluding waypoints and tracks.
o
DeLorme Topo North America Data Series — 9-17
DeLorme Topo North America base map data.
o
Satellite Imagery (SAT10) — 9-11
True-color 10-meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite
(Satellites d’observation de la Terre). Downloaded using the NetLink tab.
o
USGS Quads (3DTQ) — 12-14
Color contour topographic maps produced by the United States Geological Survey.
Downloaded using the NetLink tab.
o
Aerial Imagery (DOQQ) — 15-16
Black and white 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography. Downloaded using
the NetLink tab.
o
Color Aerial Imagery (DOQQ) — 13-17
True-color 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography. Downloaded using the
NetLink tab.
286
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
o
1:50K Canada Topographic Map Sheets — 10-15
Coverage for most of Canada. Can overlay other maps. These maps are made
from original Canadian map sheets and are a combination of Toporama maps,
photomaps, and scanned maps. They include not only topographic contour lines
and water but also significant buildings, historic sites, and other man-made
features in urban areas. Downloaded using the NetLink tab.
o
NOAA Nautical Charts (varies)
Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Downloaded using the NetLink tab.
o
USGS Hi-resolution 133 City Imagery — 13-17
Color aerial imagery over the country's largest metropolitan areas with a
resolution of approximately 1/3 meter (or about 1 foot).
•
Click Use Defaults to return the slider controls to their default minimum and
maximum values.
•
Raster imagery (such as USGS Quads, aerial imagery, NOAA nautical charts, and
satellite imagery) includes color-coded data zoom level suggestions under Zoom
Range.
•
Green indicates the data zoom levels at which the data is best viewed on the
device. The default values are set to only export data zoom levels that are in the
green area.
•
Red indicates zoom levels at which the data is available but not necessarily the
best viewed.
•
Maps with multiple data types have large file sizes. To decrease the file size when
exporting multiple map data types, try exporting raster data with small data zoom
level ranges.
•
For information on how data zoom levels display on Earthmate PN-Series GPS
devices, see Data Zoom Level/Scale Bar Translation.
Grid Size Comparisons
When you use the Handheld Export tab to export maps, you can choose a grid size. A grid
of the same size gets progressively larger in coverage (square area) the closer it is to the
287
Topo USA User Guide
equator. This is because the grid system is based on the latitude/longitude coordinate
system.
60 seconds = 1 minute
60 minutes = 1 degree
A 1.5 degree grid = 9 30 minute grids, 324 5 minute grids, 8,100 1 minute grids, or
202,500 12 second grids.
A 30 minute grid = 36 5 minute grids, 900 1 minute grids, or 22,500 12 second grids.
A 5 minute grid = 25 1 minute grids or 625 12 second grids.
A 1 minute grid = 25 12 second grids.
Grid
Factor
Size
1.5
9 x 30
degree
minute
30
36 x 5
minute
minute
5 minute
25 x 1
# of
# of
# of
# of
Display
Grids
Grids
Grids
Grids
Range
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
4-20
9
1
N/A
N/A
6-20
324
36
1
N/A
8-20
8,100
900
25
1
11-20
202,500
22,500
625
25
13-20
minute
1 minute
25 x 12
second
12
N/A
second
Data Zoom Level/Scale Bar Translation
Your DeLorme application and your Earthmate PN-Series GPS device use different methods
for representing the map's scale. In DeLorme Topo North America, scale is represented as a
data zoom level (1-17). The Earthmate PN-Series GPS device uses a scale bar, based on the
measurement units chosen in Device Setup.
288
Using Earthmate PN-Series GPS Devices
The following table describes the correlation between data zoom levels in your DeLorme
application and the scale bars on the device.
Data
Zoom
Scale Bar Label
km/m
mi/ft
NM/ft
NM/m
1
1000km
500mi
500NM
500NM
2
500km
250mi
250NM
250NM
3
250km
125mi
125NM
125NM
4
125km
64mi
64NM
64NM
5
64km
32mi
32NM
32NM
6
32km
16mi
16NM
16NM
7
16km
8mi
8NM
8NM
8
8km
4mi
4NM
4NM
9
4km
2mi
2NM
2NM
10
2km
1mi
1NM
1NM
11
1km
0.5mi
12
400m
0.25mi
0.25NM
0.25NM
13
200m
640ft
640ft
200m
14
100m
320ft
320ft
100m
15
50m
160ft
160ft
50m
16
25m
80ft
80ft
25m
17
12m
40ft
40ft
12m
Level
0.5NM
0.5NM
289
Using Third-party GPS Devices
Sending Route Information
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send
route points or route directions to your device.
To Send Route Points
Use the following steps to send route points to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Points from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route points
you want to send to your device.
8. To avoid overwriting existing points on your device, type a starting point for the new
points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not all
devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
9. Click Send to Device.
10. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
To Send Route Directions
Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
291
Topo USA User Guide
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
directions you want to send to your device.
8. Designate a route name and/or a route number for the file on the device (device
dependent).
9. To avoid overwriting existing points on your device, type a starting point for the new
points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not all
devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
10. Click Send to Device.
11. Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device.
12. Click Finish.
Sending Tracks
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send
tracks to your device.
To Send Tracks
Use the following steps to send tracks to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
to open the Exchange Wizard.
292
on the toolbar and click Other Device
Using Third-party GPS Devices
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select User Map Data - Track from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File drop-down
list.
8. Optional. Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device.
9. Click Send to Device.
10. Repeat the steps for every track file you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
Sending Waypoints
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send
waypoints to your device.
To Send Waypoints
Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File
drop-down list.
293
Topo USA User Guide
8. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point for the
new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not
all devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
9. Click Send to Device.
10. Repeat the steps for every waypoint file you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
Receiving a Route
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
receive routes created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping
program.
To Receive a Route
Use the following steps to receive a route from your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Route from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Select Route from the Save As drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the route name or route number on the device that you want to receive.
9. Select the route file you want to add the route information to. If you want to create a
new route file, select New from the Route drop-down list and type the new route
name in the available text box.
10. Click Receive from Device.
11. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to receive from your device.
294
Using Third-party GPS Devices
12. Click Finish.
Receiving a Track
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
receive tracks created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping
program.
Note When you open a track you've imported from your GPS device, you may notice that
the track does not join existing roads. Use the select tool in the Draw tab to snap the end
node of the track to a road. For more information, see Snapping Draw Objects.
To Receive a Track
Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Track from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Select User Map Data - Track from the Save As drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to receive. Not
all devices support downloading individual track logs. See your device manual for
more information.
9. Select the track file you want to add the track information to. To create a new track
file, select New from the Track File drop-down list and type the new track file name
in the New Track File text box.
10. Optional. Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box.
11. Click Receive from Device.
295
Topo USA User Guide
12. Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device.
13. Click Finish.
Receiving Waypoints
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
receive waypoints created on your device and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file.
Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File
Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
You may have to use specific settings for your device. For example, if you are using
a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For
more information, see your device owner manual.
2. Click the arrow next to the Sync button
on the toolbar and click Other Device
to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your
device.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Save As drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the
Waypoint File drop-down list. To create a new Waypoint file, select New from the
Waypoint File drop-down list and type the new waypoint file name in the New
Waypoint File text box.
9. If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol (such as the
default red flag), select the Use Current Waypoint (active waypoint) option. If
you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third-party device, select the
Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set
from the drop-down list. For more information on creating a custom symbol set, see
Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol.
10. Click Receive From Device.
296
Using Third-party GPS Devices
11. Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive.
12. Click Finish.
297
Using Small-screen Devices
Using Small-screen Devices
You can use your mapping application with small-screen devices, such as netbooks and
UMPCs (Ultra Mobile PCs). If you are installing the software on a netbook or small-screen
device, select Netbook Mode as the default mode during installation. If you do not select
Netbook Mode when you install, you can enable it at any time: tlick the Options menu
arrow and click Netbook Mode to select the check box. To turn off Netbook Mode, clear the
check box.
The default interface minimizes the tab area, hides the Control Panel, and shows only the
toolbar buttons you need for navigating and tracking on a small screen; however, you can
add or remove tabs, show or hide toolbar buttons, and customize the interface to meet your
needs. You can also view an overview map at the same time using the split-screen.
This screen is optimized for a netbook and is displaying GPS with NavMode in 3-D.
299
Topo USA User Guide
Your DeLorme Topo North America license allows you to install a copy of the software on a
portable device in addition to your computer. Please see the license agreement for your
software for further information:
DeLorme Topo North America Single-User License Agreement
300
Profiling Linear Objects
Creating a Profile
You can use the Profile tab to create elevation graphs of linear objects on the map. Linear
objects can be part of the map or part of a draw layer. A linear object is profiled from one
end of the line to the other. The profile includes statistical data; you can determine which
available data you want to display. You can also create a profile that includes user data from
some athletic devices from Timex® and Suunto®.
The list below includes samples of map features and draw objects that you can profile.
•
Routes (created
•
Streams
using the Route
•
Tracks (created using the Draw
tab)
•
Trails
•
Roads
•
Boundaries
•
Railroads
•
Power lines
•
Pipelines
tab or imported from a GPS
device)
•
Lines (created using the Draw
tab)
•
Arcs (created using the Draw tab)
•
Splines (created using the Draw
tab)
•
Measure Lines (created with the
Measure tool)
Notes
•
You can create profiles only on 2-D maps; however, with split-screen functionality,
you can view the highlight of the profiled object on a 3-D map.
•
To profile an object or route at any time, right-click the item and click Profile.
•
The Profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile.
•
Double-click a location on the Profile graph to center the map on the location without
changing the data zoom level.
•
The highlighted profile object on the map is retained if you go to another tab and
then return to the Profile tab. The selected object is not retained between program
sessions.
•
To view all the features available on the Profile tab, click the More button
near the bottom of the tab to expand the view.
To Create a Profile
301
Topo USA User Guide
Use the following steps to create a profile.
1. Center your map on the area with the linear object you want to profile.
OR
Center the route you want to profile on the map.
2. Click the Profile button
on the Profile tab or on the toolbar to activate it.
3. Move your pointer over the 2-D map. The pointer changes from
to
when it
passes over an object that you can profile.
4. Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile. When you select
the object, it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile tab area.
5. Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph.
The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the
terrain profile. These lines indicate the elevation and distance of the particular
location. A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map. An
Info box displays the profile statistics and user data (see Statistical Data and User
Profile Data for more information).
To Profile Multiple Linear Objects
•
To profile multiple linear objects, press the SHIFT key on the keyboard while clicking
the items you want to profile. Thin vertical dashed lines display in the Profile graph
indicating the beginning and end of each chosen segment.
•
To make it easier to profile multiple linear objects, use the Draw tab to join them.
•
To clear one of the multiple objects you have profiled, press the CTRL key on your
keyboard while clicking the profiled object on the map.
Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs
The Profile tab lets you view two profile elevation graphs; the profile graph and the
overview profile graph.
To View the Profile Graph
302
Profiling Linear Objects
The profile graph automatically displays when you select an object to profile. It shows a
two-dimensional image of the elevation associated with the selected object. Distance and
elevation are indicated below and to the left of the graph respectively.
Use the following steps to view a profile graph.
1. Create a profile of an object or route. For more information see Creating a Profile.
2. Move your cursor along the elevation profile in the profile graph.
•
The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top
of the terrain profile. These lines indicate the height and distance of the
particular location as you move along the graph.
•
As you move your cursor along the graph, an info box provides statistical data
about the profile, such as coordinates, elevation, grade, and so on. See
Statistical Data for more information about this data. If you downloaded an
object with supported profile data, the info box may also include additional
data (for example, speed). See User Profile Data for more information.
•
As you move your cursor along the profile graph, a small crosshair follows
along the corresponding object on the map.
3. Click the More button
near the bottom of the tab area to expand the view.
4. Optional To generate a profile from a route you have created, select the Show Text
check box to view route numbers, road names, waypoint numbers, and their
associated waypoint names.
Notes The route displays in the profile graph with small markers indicating the start
and finish for the route as well as any waypoints it contains.
5. Optional If the profile object contains additional supported data, such as that
downloaded from an athletic device, a toolbar appears above the graph. See User
Profile Data for more information about viewing and managing this data.
6. View the current statistical information options you have selected to the right of the
profile graph. See Statistical Data for more information about adding, removing, and
303
Topo USA User Guide
reordering the statistics.
Tips
•
You can also profile an object or route on the map by right-clicking the item and then
clicking Profile.
•
To view your object's profile in the opposite direction, click the Reverse button
The profile order flips horizontally.
•
The profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile.
•
Double-click a location on the profile graph to center the map on the location without
changing the data zoom level.
OR
Right-click the place on the graph you want to see on the map and click Go To.
To View the Overview Profile Graph
Use the following steps to view the overview profile graph.
1. Click More
.
The overview profile graph displays at the bottom of the screen—it is a smaller
version of the main profile graph.
2. To zoom in to a specific part of the profile, place the cursor over one of the
horizontal bars on either side of the overview profile graph. When the pointer
changes to a horizontal arrow, drag the bar towards the center of the overview
profile graph.
•
When you move the bars, the main profile graph adjusts to show the area
within the borders and the right and left vertical scales adjust to fit the data
you are viewing. The area you are not viewing in the main graph is
highlighted with grey in the overview graph.
304
Profiling Linear Objects
•
When you hover your cursor over the area within the bars, the cursor
changes to a hand. Left-click to grab the area and drag it horizontally to
reposition the border focus area or to center the selection on that point.
3. To hide the overview profile graph, click Less
.
Statistical Data
You can manage the type of statistical data you want to view for a profile graph.
The profile statistic options display to the right of the profile graph. The applicable selected
options display in the info box when move your cursor along the profile graph. An info box
can also contain user data that you add to the mapping program—see User Profile Data for
more information.
To View Your Current Options
To view all options you currently have selected, click the More button
near the
bottom of the Profile tab to expand your view.
To Remove an Option
Use the following steps to remove an option from the statistics list.
1. Move your cursor over the statistic you want to delete.
An X appears in the cell.
2. Click the X to remove the option.
305
Topo USA User Guide
To Add an Option
When one or more options have been removed, use the following steps to made add an
option to the statistics list.
1. Move your cursor over Click to add statistics and click.
A list of available statistic options opens.
2. Click an option to add it.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to add more options.
This table describes the statistic options available in the statistic list and/or the profile info
box. List options are bold.
Statistical Data
Description
Option
Linear
The flat distance of the profile. Does not take elevation into
Distance*
account.
Terrain
The 3-D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise and
Distance*
descent.
Climbing
The total distance where the terrain is uphill.
Distance*
Descending
The total distance where the terrain is downhill.
Distance*
Current Elevation
The elevation above sea level at a specific point.
Elevation Gain*
The difference in elevation from the start of the profile to the end of
306
Profiling Linear Objects
the profile.
Climbing
The amount of ascending vertical distance.
Elevation
Descending
The amount of descending vertical distance.
Elevation*
Grade
Actually percent grade, rise over run (100 x (rise/run)). For
example, 6 means that for every 100 ft, you gain 6 ft in elevation.
Average Grade*
Average of the grade from the start to the current cursor position
(or finish).
Minimum
The elevation of the lowest point on a profile.
Elevation
Maximum
The elevation of the highest point on a profile.
Elevation
Zone**
A named grid system of any of the UTM/UPS, MGRS, or State Plane
coordinate systems used as a basis for coordinate display. For
example, UTM zone 19 specifies the six-degree swath between
longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S to 80N. Another
example is zone ME-W in the State Plane coordinate system, which
specifies an area that covers the western half of Maine. When using
one these coordinate systems, the current zone and coordinates
east and north (the eastings and northings) of the zone origin are
displayed.
Easting**
The measure of a position relative to the x-axis (horizontal) of a
grid system.
Northing**
The measure of a position relative to the y-axis (vertical) of a grid
system.
Latitude***
The measure of a position on the earth's surface north or south of
the equator in degrees, minutes, and seconds. Defined as the angle
from the equator's horizontal plane perpendicular to the polar axis.
Latitude is measured in degrees minutes and seconds. All lines of
latitude are parallel and are often referred to as parallels.
307
Topo USA User Guide
Longitude***
The measure of a position on the surface of the earth east or west
of the Prime Meridian in degrees, minutes, and seconds. Defined as
the angle from the vertical plane running through the polar axis and
the prime meridian. Longitude is measured in degrees minutes and
seconds. All lines of longitude meet at the poles and are often
referred to as meridians.
*Calculated from the start of the profile to the current cursor position. If the cursor is not in the profile area, then
the value is calculated from the start of the profile to the end of the profile.
**This statistical information is available only if UTM/UPS, SPCS, USNG, or MGRS is selected as the coordinate
system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
***This statistical information is available only if a latitude/longitude format is selected as the coordinate system in
the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Note For information on manually setting your minimum and maximum elevation, see
Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation.
Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation
You can manually set a maximum or minimum elevation to display in your profile graph.
To Manually Adjust Minimum and Maximum Elevation
Use the following steps to manually adjust minimum and maximum elevation.
1. Create a profile.
2. Click the More button
.
3. To control the maximum height displayed on the profile graph, under Manual Scale,
select the Max Elev check box and type the maximum height in the text box.
This adjusts the top end of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display
heights above the defined height.
4. To control the minimum height displayed on the profile graph, under Manual Scale,
select the Min Elev check box and type the minimum height in the text box.
This adjusts the base level of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display
heights below the height specified.
Note Distance displays in the units you set in the Options dialog box. For more
information, see Setting Units of Measure Preferences.
Clearing a Profile
308
Profiling Linear Objects
Once you select an object to profile, you can clear the highlighted feature from the map and
the profile graphs from the Profile tab.
To Clear a Profile
Use one of the options below to clear the map object highlight and the currently displaying
Profile graph.
Click the Clear button
•
on the Profile tab.
OR
Press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking a profiled object on the map.
•
OR
•
Right-click the profiled object and click Clear Profile.
User Profile Data
User profile data is data you add to a DeLorme mapping program. You can attach it to a
track or .gpl file using GeoTagger or use the Exchange Wizard to download a track that
contains the data from a device that records GPS data, such as some athletic devices from
Timex and Suunto. If you are using an Earthmate PN-Series GPS, use Earthmate GPS Sync
to add the track file to your mapping program.
Types of Data
You can profile several types of data. When you profile a track or a .gpl file that includes the
data, the profile graph displays a colored line for each type of data. The types of data, their
scales, and default graph colors (modifiable) are:
Data Type
Default
Scale
Color
Map Elevation
Black
ft, mi, m, or km
Default type - from map topographic
Matches the units set on the Display tab in the
data
Options dialog box.
Track Elevation
Green
ft, mi, m, or km
Matches the units set on the Display tab in the
Options dialog box.
Speed
Blue
fps, mph, mps, or kmh
Matches the units set on the Display tab in the
Options dialog box.
309
Topo USA User Guide
Pedal Cadence
Purple
rps, rpm, rph
Depends on data.
Heart Rate
Red
bpm
Temperature
Maroon
°F or °C
Depends on data.
To View Information for a Specific Data Type
When you have multiple types of user data, you can choose which type to focus on using
the "follow" function.
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently followed data
type displays to the right of the graph.
2. To follow a different data type:
•
In the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type and click Follow.
OR
•
Right-click the line for the data type on the graph, point to Follow in the
menu, and click the data type.
3. Move your cursor along the data profile in the profile graph to view the data in the
info box. For more information about viewing the profile graph, see Viewing the
Profile Elevation Graphs.
To Hide or Show a Specific Data Type
You can hide and show data on the profile graph.
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently followed data
type displays to the right of the profile graph.
2. To hide or show a data type, on the toolbar, click the data type button to toggle it on
or off.
To Change the User Data Type Color
You can change the user data type default colors or change from a user-defined color back
to the default.
310
Profiling Linear Objects
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently followed data
type displays to the right of the profile graph.
2. To change the default data type color:
3. To a new color—on the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type, click Choose
Color, and select a new color in the color dialog box.
OR
4. To the default color—on the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type and click
Use Default Color.
311
Viewing Your Map in 3-D
Viewing a 3-D Map
On the 3-D tab, you can view your map data in 3-D and change the look of your 3-D map
using the tools on the tab or keyboard shortcuts.
Notes
•
You can view 3-D maps only in the left (secondary) map window; however, you can
expand the left map window to fit the entire map area. For more information, see
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas.
•
You can customize how a 3-D map displays with the 3-D tab in the Options dialog box.
For more information, see Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences.
•
The 3-D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme is for 3-D use. When you select the
scheme, you can use keyboard shortcuts to perform all of the same functions that you
can complete on the 3-D tab. For more information, see Flying Over a 3-D Map.
•
If the 3-D tab does not work properly, it may be because you have turned off hardware
acceleration in your display settings. To check you hardware acceleration status, view
the Advanced Display Settings in the Windows Control Panel.
To View a Map in 3-D
Use the following steps to view a 3-D map.
1. Expose the left map window using the map resize tool and then select 3-D from the
drop-down list at the top of the left map window.
A progress bar displays in the lower-left corner of the map to display the 3-D
drawing status.
OR
Click the 3-D tab and then click Show 3-D.
A progress bar displays in the lower-left corner of the map to display the 3-D
drawing status.
2. On the 3-D tab, under 3-D View, select the viewing mode.
The top option is an Outside-looking-in perspective. This view focuses on the
center of the map — this allows you to spin the map around the center point.
The bottom option is an Inside-looking-out perspective. This view is from the
center of the map — this allows you to spin the map around you.
313
Topo USA User Guide
3. Use the Rotate controls to rotate the 3-D map to the new position.
The reference arrow points to the direction that you will be viewing on the map,
which varies depending on the 3-D View selection you made in step 2). The degree
of map rotation displays above the Rotate arrows. You can rotate the 3-D map using
one of the following methods:
•
Press and hold the left arrow button to rotate the map clockwise.
•
Press and hold the right arrow button to rotate the map counter-clockwise.
•
Drag the square map in the Rotate graphic to the new position.
•
Click anywhere on the square map in the Rotate graphic to move the map in
that direction.
•
Click a directional letter (N, S, W, or E) to rotate the map in that direction.
•
Click the brown area that surrounds the square map to rotate the map in that
direction.
4. Use the Pitch controls to change the pitch of the 3-D map.
The pitch range depends on the terrain. 90° looks straight up, -90° looks straight
down, and 0° is horizontal.
You can control the pitch using one of the following methods:
•
Press and hold the up arrow to increase the pitch.
•
Press and hold the down arrow to decrease the pitch.
•
Drag the reference arrow to the new pitch.
•
Click anywhere on the graphic to update the pitch.
5. If you selected the Outside-looking-in perspective, you can adjust the distance from
the map center using the Distance up/down buttons, by clicking the Distance
graphic at the distance you want or by dragging the numeric distance display in the
Distance graphic.
OR
If you selected the Inside-looking-out perspective, you can adjust the elevation of
the view over the 3-D map using the Elevation up/down buttons, by clicking the
Elevation graphic at the elevation, or by dragging the numeric elevation display in
the Elevation graphic.
Note Elevation indicates the height above terrain, not the height above sea level.
6. To pan the 3-D map and simulate a fly-over, drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the
direction you want.
314
Viewing Your Map in 3-D
7. Click Hide 3-D when finished.
The map changes to a 2-D view.
OR
Select 2-D from the drop-down list at the top of the left map window when finished.
Tips
•
When the 3-D map window is open, you can use the grab and pan tool on the
toolbar, Compass Rose navigation tools, zoom tools, and/or the overview map
window to adjust the 3-D map.
•
Scroll along the edges of the 2-D map or pan with the navigation tools to redraw the
2-D background; the 3-D map redraws with the new map center.
•
Click a point on the 3-D map to center the map on that point.
•
When you move your cursor on the right map, a 3-D cursor echoes that movement
on the left map.
Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences
Use the 3-D tab in the Options dialog box to customize your 3-D maps with increased
vertical exaggeration, billboards, a GPS tracking cursor type, and more.
To Set Your 3-D Map Preferences
Use the following steps to set your 3-D map preferences.
1. Click the Options button
on the toolbar and then click Options. Then,
click the 3-D tab. (You may have to scroll the tab area to see the 3-D tab.)
OR
Click the 3-D tab to open it and click the Options button
•
.
If you want the right map to rotate/pan in the same direction as the left map,
select the Link 2-D and 3-D Map Rotation check box. The 2-D map updates
after the 3-D map finishes panning/rotating.
Note If you do not select this check box, you can use the data zoom level
tools above the left map window to adjust the zoom level of the 3-D map.
•
If you want to view billboards on your 3-D map, select the Show Billboards
check box.
Note If you receive a message saying that 3-D billboards cannot be
displayed, ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest drivers
and that it supports DirectX and transparencies.
315
Topo USA User Guide
•
To select the cursor graphic that you want to display on the 3-D map when
GPS tracking, select the symbol type from the GPS Tracking Cursor dropdown list.
•
To select a vertical exaggeration value, click one of the vertical exaggeration
graphics (from left to right—flat, 1x, 2x, 4x, or 8x).
2. Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog box.
Flying Over a 3-D Map
You can simulate flying over the 3-D terrain. Access these features using the Pan feature in
the 3-D tab or by activating the 3-D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme.
To Fly Over a 3-D Map Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Use the following steps to fly over a 3-D map using keyboard shortcuts.
1. View a map in 3-D.
2. Click the Options button
on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard
Shortcuts tab.
OR
Click the 3-D tab, click the Options button
, and then click the Keyboard
Shortcuts tab.
3. Select 3-D Navigation (DeLorme Scheme) from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click OK to activate the selected scheme.
5. To rotate the map to the right, press ALT+D on your keyboard.
OR
To rotate the map to the left, press ALT+A on your keyboard.
6. To increase the pitch, press ALT+W on your keyboard.
OR
To decrease the pitch, press ALT+S on your keyboard.
7. To increase the distance/elevation, press ALT+Page Up on your keyboard .
OR
To decrease the distance/elevation, press ALT+Page Down on your keyboard.
316
Viewing Your Map in 3-D
8. To pan the map to the right, press ALT+Right (the right arrow) on your keyboard.
OR
To pan the map to the left, press ALT+Left on your keyboard.
9. To pan the map forward, press ALT+Up on your keyboard.
OR
To pan the map backward, press ALT+Down on your keyboard.
To Fly Over a 3-D Map Using the Pan Tool
Use the following steps to fly over a 3-D map.
1. View a map in 3-D.
2. Click the 3-D tab to open it and drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the direction to
view.
Tutorial: Fly in 3-D
The 3-D feature lets you “fly” over the 3-D map, letting you simulate an upcoming hike or
road trip. This is great for when you want to get a feel for the elevation differences and
surroundings along the way.
Step 1—Create a route
Create a trail route using right-click options, the toolbar, or the Route tab. For more
information on creating a route, see the Creating a Route tutorial or Creating a Route Help
topic.
317
Topo USA User Guide
Step 2—Save the route as a GPS log file
Right-click the calculated route and click Save as GPS Log File.
Step 3—Open the GPS log file
Open the newly created GPS Log file using the GPS Log subtab in the GPS tab.
Step 4—Play the GPS log file
Click the Play button to play back the GPS Log file.
318
Viewing Your Map in 3-D
Step 5—Adjust 3-D settings
Use the tools in the 3-D tab to adjust the rotation, pitch, and more.
Step 6—View the map in 3-D while you play back the GPS log file
Drag the resize tool to the right (or double-click the bar above the right arrow) to view the
map in full, 3-D mode. Make sure 3-D is selected in the select map view drop-down list.
319
Using NetLink and MapShare
NetLink Overview
NetLink is an online portal within DeLorme Topo North America. You must have an Internet
connection to use NetLink.
The NetLink tab has four sections, or subtabs. Click the NetLink Help button
on the
Map Library subtab for more information and detailed help. See the Add a Map to PN-Series
GPS tutorial to learn how to add a map to your GPS device.
Map Library
Use the Map Library subtab to select imagery and data and process your map order.
Info
Get Map Library news, information about your account, and check for available updates.
Downloads
View information about in-progress orders, download completed orders, and view your
download history.
Support
Your connection to DeLorme—links to technical support, the forums, the DeLorme Weblog,
and more. You can also submit a map correction to us.
Tutorial: Share Maps
MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions or profiles to send to
your friends, family, and associates.
Step 1—Open the MapShare Wizard
Click the MapShare button
on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard.
Step 2—Select the type of information you want to share
Select Share the Current Map View (a static map), Share a Route Map and Directions,
or Share the Current Profile and then click Next.
For this tutorial, we will share a route map and directions.
321
Topo USA User Guide
Step 3—Select the route to share
Select the route file you want to share from the Available Routes drop-down list and then
click Next.
Step 4—Add a title or notes to the route map
322
Using NetLink and MapShare
To add a title or notes to your route map, type the appropriate information in the text boxes
and click Next.
Step 5—Add notes to the directions
Then, if you would like to add notes to display with your directions, type them in the Notes
text box and click Next.
323
Topo USA User Guide
Step 6—View upload confirmation
A message informs you that your map has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site.
Click Next.
Step 7—Preview or e-mail the route
Click E-mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions to email a link of
your route map and directions. This option is available only if an email program is detected.
If an email program is not detected, copy and paste the link provided into your email
program.
AND/OR
Click Preview Your Route Map and Directions to preview your route map and directions
as they appear on the MapShare site.
Note Print your route map and directions from the MapShare site by clicking Print in the
upper right corner of the page.
324
Using NetLink and MapShare
Step 8—Exit the MapShare Wizard
Click Close to exit the MapShare Wizard.
325
Using GeoTagger
Getting Started with GeoTagger
Use the GeoTagger Wizard to:
•
Sync digital photos with GPS log files (.gpl) and track files (.an2) and tag them to
the location you took them. You can place images as an actual image on the map, a
MapNote with a hyperlink, or a symbol with a hyperlink.
•
Match GPS logs and tracks to time-related information downloaded from supported
devices. For example, you can download a track that includes your heart rate from
an athletic device and view the data in the Profile tab. The program uses the
following file formats: Suunto (*.sdf), Timex Trainer CSV (*.csv), or Generic CSV File
(*.csv).
To open the GeoTagger Wizard, click the GeoTagger button
on the toolbar. The
Geotagger button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the menu
and click GeoTagger.
Important! Make sure the time and date on your camera or athletic device and on your
GPS device match before you begin. This ensures that your images and data are correctly
matched to the GPS log file or track file. If you do not have the correct time on your device,
you can update the information with the Timestamp Offset option in the wizard. See
Calculating the Timestamp Offset.
Tagging an Image
Once you successfully tag your digital images to a GPS log file or track file, you can view the
points at which the photos were taken on the map in your DeLorme program.
Before you begin, you must download the GPS log file or track file and digital photographs
to your computer. See Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS Device for information
on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files.
To Tag an Image
1. Click the GeoTagger button
on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard.
2. Select Images and click Next.
327
Topo USA User Guide
3. In the Photo Directory box, type the path and file name for the folder (not specific
images) on your computer where the images are stored.
OR
Click Browse to search for the folder on your computer.
4. Under Time Zone, select the time zone where you were when you took the pictures.
See GMT Time Zone Information for a table of time zones by state.
If Daylight Saving Time was in effect (second Sunday in March through first Sunday
in November), select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check box.
5. Under GPS Data, select Track or GPL File.
6. If you selected Track, the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu.
Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu, and click the track. You can select only
one track at a time.
If you selected GPL File, in the GPS Data box, type the path and file name for the
file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
7. Click Next.
The Image list displays the images that will be tagged. Click an image to preview it
in Image Preview window.
8. Under Time Offset, if the time on your camera differed from actual time when you
recorded the data, calculate the offset, type the actual time in the Matching GPS
Time text box.
9. Click Next.
10. Select how you want to place the image on the map.
•
Hyperlink–A MapNote with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map.
•
Embedded–A MapNote with a thumbnail image hyperlinked to the image
displays on the map.
•
Symbol–A camera symbol with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map.
11. Click Next.
A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your images. Click
Finish. When you view the GPS log file or track on the map, you can see where the
images are tagged.
OR
An error message displays; usually this is because the timestamps for the camera
and the file or track do not match.
328
Using GeoTagger
Tagging Data
Once you successfully tag your data to a GPS log file or track file, you can view the points
where the data was recorded on the map and in the Profile tab in your DeLorme program.
Before you begin, you must download the GPS log file or track file and the data file[Suunto
(*.sdf), Timex Trainer CSV (*.csv), or Generic CSV File (*.csv)] to your computer. See
Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS Device for information on using the Exchange
Wizard to transfer files.
To Tag Data
1. Click the GeoTagger button
on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard.
2. Select Data File and click Next.
3. In the Data File Location box, type the path and file name for the file.
OR
Click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
4. Under Time Zone, select the time zone for your device.
If Daylight Saving Time was in effect (second Sunday in March through first Sunday
in November) when you recorded the data, select the Adjust for Daylight Saving
Time check box.
5. Under GPS Data, select Track or GPL File.
6. If you selected Track, the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu.
Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu, and click the track. You can select only
one track at a time.
If you selected GPL File, in the GPS Data box, type the path and file name for the
file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
7. Click Next.
8. For Generic CSV Files only, under Data File, select the appropriate data type for
each category from the drop-down lists.
•
The top row categories are the types of data and units that the program
recognizes. For example, if your device recorded the speed in kilometers per
hour, make sure you select Speed (kmh). If you do not have data for a
particular category, leave it blank.
•
You can use the second row to assign columns of data in your .csv file to a
specific type of data. For example, if you have a temperature field named "T"
329
Topo USA User Guide
—; select T from the drop-down list that is below the Temperature category in
the first row.
9. For Generic CSV Files only, select your device's time format from the Time Format
drop-down list.
10. Under Offset, if the time on your device differed from actual time when you
recorded the data, calculate the offset, type the actual time in the Matching GPS
Time text box.
11. Click Next.
A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your data. Click Finish.
You can view the data on the Profile tab.
OR
An error message displays; usually this is because the timestamps for the device and
the file or track do not match.
Calculate the Timestamp Offset
The time on your camera or data device must match the time in the track or GPS log so the
images or data display in the correct place. If they do not, you must calculate a timestamp
offset. If possible, do this before you use the GeoTagger Wizard.
To Calculate the Timestamp Offset Before Using the Wizard
Use these steps to calculate the timestamp offset before you use the GeoTagger Wizard.
1. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
2. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture or recorded
data.
3. Make a note of the time.
4. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps.
5. When you get to the screen with the offset option, highlight the image or data point
in the file list.
The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
6. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.
To Calculate the Timestamp Offset When Using the Wizard
Use the following steps to calculate the timestamp offset if you are already using the
GeoTagger Wizard.
1. Click Cancel to exit the GeoTagger Wizard.
330
Using GeoTagger
2. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
3. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture or recorded
data.
4. Make a note of the time.
5. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps until you get to the
screen with the offset option.
6. Highlight the image or data point in the file list.
The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
7. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.
331
Legal Information
DeLorme Topo North America 10.0 Single-User License
Agreement
This is an Agreement between you, the end user, and DeLorme. By using the DeLorme
Topo North America 10.0 software, data and documentation (the “System”), you are
agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, you may not use the System. Return
all materials within thirty (30) days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them
or to DeLorme for a full refund.
Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms
or conditions of this License Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to
this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in writing by both parties.
LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
THE LICENSED SYSTEM
The System consists of DeLorme's patented (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319; 5,030,117;
5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158; other patents pending) processes for the formatting,
storage, retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data;
DeLorme's copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related
functions; and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to
DeLorme or its licensors. The entire System, including the software, documentation, data
compilations, screen displays and map printouts are protected by U.S. and foreign
copyright. You have no ownership rights in the System. Rather, you have a license to use
the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect.
YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM
Permitted Use. This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a nonexclusive basis for personal, reference or business purposes on a single computer at one
time. You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal
computer. However, one of these two computers must be portable and the software may
not be used simultaneously on both computers. Otherwise, once you have installed the
System on one computer you may use the System on a second computer only if you delete
the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license. Installation of any part
of the System on a network is prohibited unless you have a separate network license. For
333
Topo USA User Guide
information on network or multiple-user licensing, contact DeLorme at
ProSales@delorme.com or 1-800-293-2389. You may use the System as instructed by the
documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this
Agreement.
Paper Map Printout Rights. You may reproduce paper copies or static digital images,
such as PDF or TIFF files, of any DELORME TOPO NORTH AMERICA map for personal or
household use or, if you are a business or institution, for in-house purposes, provided that
distribution and use of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where
the System is installed or limited to use by employees based at that location.
Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights. You may distribute to family and friends,
including via fax, paper copies or static digital images, such as PDF or TIFF files, of
DELORME TOPO NORTH AMERICA map printouts depicting locations of personal interest.
You may distribute to your colleagues, clients, customers or prospects, including via fax,
paper copies or static digital images, such as PDF or TIFF files, of DELORME TOPO NORTH
AMERICA map printouts depicting the location of your business or institution or the locations
of your business or institution-related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that
contain no paid advertising.
Paper Report Distribution Rights. You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or
clients up to one thousand (1,000) paper copies of any DELORME TOPO NORTH AMERICA
map printouts for use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies,
provided that no such report includes more than fifty (50) different DELORME TOPO NORTH
AMERICA maps and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted
publication for sale or resale or contain paid advertising.
Periodical Illustrations. You may reproduce paper copies of any DELORME TOPO NORTH
AMERICA map printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works, such as
magazines, newspapers and newsletters, provided that the publication is not primarily a
collection of maps, and provided that proper legend, as described below, accompanies the
output. Such articles may also be posted on your Web site. Graphic printers hired by
licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license.
Web Site Map Display Rights. You may display on your personal, business or institutional
Web site static map images derived from the System, provided that you include the Legend
indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www.delorme.com
from any page featuring a DeLorme map image. If you subcontract a web developer to
display map images said web developer must purchase a license.
334
Legal Information
Legend. Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following
credit and copyright notice: “© 2010 DeLorme (www.delorme.com) TOPO NORTH
AMERICA™”. You may not remove, alter, or conceal any copyright or trademark notices
appearing on any System output, except that when creating a mural map, you need only
retain a single legend with scale, for use in the field.
Copy Services. You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are
authorized by this Agreement.
NetLink Tab. All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink Tab is subject to
DeLorme’s specific data use license agreement associated with those products. Commercial
use of NetLink data is prohibited.
You understand and agree that the trademarks, trade names, service marks,
copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the
sole and exclusive property of DeLorme and that you will not hold yourself
out as having any ownership rights thereto. You further agree that you will
make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement.
PROHIBITIONS ON USE
No Resale or Distribution. Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement, you do not have
the right to sell, or to reproduce or distribute for sale, any part of the System or output of
the System alone or in combination with any other text, data, software, or graphic matter.
No Interactive Use. You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with
the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme.
No Modifications or Decompilation. Except through use of any software modification
functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way,
incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work. You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or otherwise access source code or the
logical structure and contents of the System database.
No Third Party/Service Bureau Use. Except as specifically provided in this Agreement,
you may not (a) permit any third party to use the System or transfer, disclose or otherwise
make available the System to any third party, (b) use the System in the operation of a
service bureau or (c) allow access to the System through terminals located outside your
premises. You agree to secure and protect the System in a manner consistent with the
335
Topo USA User Guide
maintenance of DeLorme’s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or
agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your
obligations hereunder.
No Copies. The copying of the System, any portion of the System, or any of the printed
materials accompanying the System is strictly prohibited.
All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme.
ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A SEPARATE
EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT. CONTACT DELORME AT CUSTOM@DELORME.COM FOR
DETAILS AND PRICING.
WARNING, WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMER
Warning. THE SYSTEM IS SUITABLE AND INTENDED ONLY FOR GENERAL VISUAL
REFERENCE USE. IT SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE REQUIRING EXACT
MEASUREMENT OF DISTANCE OR DIRECTION, OR FOR PRECISION IN ADDRESS LOCATION
OR IN THE DEPICTION OF GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES. ROUTING DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE
USED ONLY AS A TRAVEL AID AND MUST ALWAYS BE VISUALLY VERIFIED BY THE USER ON
THE GROUND AND EXECUTED WITH DUE REGARD TO TRAFFIC AND ROAD CONDITIONS,
ROAD SIGNS AND REGULATIONS. Please note that the Data is merely a graphical
representation of geographic features appearing on the face of the earth. The Data may
include features, such as roads and trails that are located on private property. Nothing in
this License grants the use of, or is intended to imply the right to use, any such private
property. You should respect all landowner restrictions. You are solely responsible for
complying with all legal requirements relating to land use and for your own safety and for
the consequences of your actions in your use of the Data.
Limited Warranty on Media. DeLorme warrants that the media on which the System is
furnished shall, for a period of sixty (60) days from date of receipt (the "Warranty Period"),
be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use. If a defect in the
media appears during the Warranty Period, return all materials to DeLorme for replacement,
or at DeLorme’s option, refund of the license fee.
Disclaimer of Warranty. DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the
System, or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error-free. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE,
THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED “AS IS” AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER
336
Legal Information
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
No Consequential Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
TERMINATION AND TRANSFER
DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason, including, but not
limited to, if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or
that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way. Termination will be
effective upon written notice to you. Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to
promptly return all copies of the System, documentation and other materials furnished to
you or made by you, including unauthorized copies. Termination is in addition to and not in
lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme. All provisions relating to property rights
shall survive termination. You are not authorized to transfer your rights under this
Agreement.
OTHER
This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and supersedes
and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding, whether oral or
written, with respect to its subject matter. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Maine, applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in
Maine. Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in
Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court.
U.S. Government Rights in Commercial Software
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the Licensed Data except
any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software
license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in
DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) or DFARS 227.225-7013 (OCT 1988), as
applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.227-14 or FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Copyright © 2013 DeLorme. All rights reserved.
337
Topo USA User Guide
Important Notices
Patent and Copyright Notice
DeLorme Topo North America is a limited field of use license under United States Patent law
including the following patents owned by DeLorme: U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319; 5,030,117;
5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158. Other patents pending. All software, data
compilations, screen displays and map printouts are all protected by U.S. and foreign
copyright and owned by DeLorme or its licensors. Purchaser of license acquires no rights
that are not specifically set forth in the License Agreement included in the documentation.
U.S. Government Rights in Commercial Software
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the
commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by
DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7203-3(a) or DFARS 227.2257013 (OCT 1988), as applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.227-14 or FAR 52.227-19, as
applicable.
Copyright © 2009 DeLorme.
Curl License
Copyright © 1996-2009, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
338
Legal Information
LibTiff License
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for
any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices
and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation,
and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising
or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam
Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
CSMap License
Copyright © 2008, Autodesk, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Autodesk, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Autodesk, Inc. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
339
Topo USA User Guide
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL Autodesk, Inc. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Boost License
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy
of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software")
to use, reproduce, display, distribute,execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare
derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license
grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer,must be included in all copies of the
Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or
derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a
source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
JasPer License
JasPer License Version 2.0
Copyright © 1999-2000 Image Power, Inc.
Copyright © 1999-2000 The University of British Columbia
Copyright © 2001-2003 Michael David Adams
340
Legal Information
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person (the"User") obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction,including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge,publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
1. The above copyright notices and this permission notice (which includes the disclaimer
below) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
2. The name of a copyright holder shall not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from the Software without specific prior written permission.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS
LICENSE. NO USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS
DISCLAIMER. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS"AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE. NO ASSURANCES ARE PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS THAT THE
SOFTWARE DOES NOT INFRINGE THE PATENT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
OF ANY OTHER ENTITY. EACH COPYRIGHT HOLDER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY TO THE
USER FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE. AS A CONDITION TO EXERCISING THE
RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EACH USER HEREBY ASSUMES SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO
SECURE ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS NEEDED, IF ANY. THE SOFTWARE
IS NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN MISSION-CRITICAL
SYSTEMS, SUCH AS THOSE USED IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES,AIRCRAFT
NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS, DIRECT
LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE
SOFTWARE OR SYSTEM COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH,PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE
PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
341
Topo USA User Guide
ShapeLib License
Copyright © 1999, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
GDAL Proj4 License
Copyright © 2000, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
342
Legal Information
GDAL gtiff Format License
Copyright © 2002, Industrial Light & Magic, a division of Lucas Digital Ltd. LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Industrial Light & Magic nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GDAL hdf4 Format License
Copyright © 1996 Hughes and Applied Research Corporation
Permission to use, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation.
343
Topo USA User Guide
GDAL pcraster Format License
Copyright © 1997-2003, Utrecht University
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Utrecht University nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GDAL grib Format License
The degrib and g2clib source code are modified versions of code produced by NOAA NWS
and are in the public domain subject to the following restrictions:
http://www.weather.gov/im/softa.htm
DISCLAIMER The United States Government makes no warranty, expressed or implied, as to
the usefulness of the software and documentation for any purpose. The U.S. Government,
its instrumentalities, officers, employees, and agents assumes no responsibility (1) for the
use of the software and documentation listed below, or (2) to provide technical support to
users.
344
Legal Information
http://www.weather.gov/disclaimer.php
The information on government servers are in the public domain, unless specifically
annotated otherwise, and may be used freely by the public so long as you do not 1) claim it
is your own (e.g. by claiming copyright for NWS information -- see below), 2) use it in a
manner that implies an endorsement or affiliation with NOAA/NWS, or 3) modify it in
content and then present it as official government material. You also cannot present
information of your own in a way that makes it appear to be official government
information..
The user assumes the entire risk related to its use of this data. NWS is providing this data
"as is," and NWS disclaims any and all warranties, whether express or implied, including
(without limitation) any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. In no event will NWS be liable to you or to any third party for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, special or exemplary damages or lost profit resulting from any use
or misuse of this data.
As required by 17 U.S.C. 403, third parties producing copyrighted works consisting
predominantly of the material appearing in NWS Web pages must provide notice with such
work(s) identifying the NWS material incorporated and stating that such material is not
subject to copyright protection.
Acxiom License
The program includes information that is proprietary to Acxiom Corporation and is protected
under U.S. copyright law and international treaty provisions. This information is licensed for
your personal or professional use and may not be resold or provide to others. You may not
distribute, sell, rent, sublicense, or lease such information in whole or in part to any third
party; you will not make such Acxiom information available in whole or in part to any other
user in any networked or time-sharing environment, or transfer the information in whole or
in part to any computer other than the PC used to access this information.
Apache License, Version 2.0
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
345
Topo USA User Guide
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as
defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that
is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control,
are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this
definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such
entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by
this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not
limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation
of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated
documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made
available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached
to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on
(or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations,
or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the
purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable
346
Legal Information
from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works
thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work
and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is
intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an
individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written
communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing
and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or
otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly
display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in
Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only
to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including
a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution
incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then
any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the
date such litigation is filed.
347
Topo USA User Guide
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative
Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form,
provided that You meet the following conditions:
You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License;
and
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the
files; and
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative
Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the
Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if
provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative
Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add
Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution
notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide
additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of
Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in
this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution
intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
348
Legal Information
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names,
trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for
reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the
content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS"
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied,
including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate
and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for
damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work
(including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure
or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such
Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or
Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of
support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and
on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to
indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or
claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or
additional liability.
349
Index
3
3-D ..................................311, 313, 315
3D Fix ........ 229, 235, 239, 246, 252, 261
3DTQ Region Coverage ....................... 60
A
About GPS ...................................... 249
Activating Speech Recognition ........... 252
Add/Delete Words ............................ 262
Adding a Symbol.............................. 184
Adding a Text Label .......................... 184
Adding a Waypoint ........................... 184
Adding Draw Objects ........................ 184
Adding Points to Draw Objects ........... 169
Adding Stops and Vias ...................... 209
Adding Text or Graphics .................... 129
Address Book .... 117, 118, 119, 120, 121,
122, 123
Advanced Search ............................. 100
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your
Map ............................................ 132
Almanac ......................................... 247
Anchor Position ................................ 201
Assembling a Multi-page Map............. 135
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts .............. 80
Audio Controls ................................. 262
Auto Zoom To Turn .......................... 229
Automatically Detect GPS .................. 229
Average Grade ................................ 303
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing
.................................................. 214
B
Back on Track ................................. 242
Basic Map Features ............................ 60
Basic Search ..................................... 98
Beep When Heard ............................ 252
Bitmap ............................................. 12
Breaking Linear Objects .................... 180
C
Category Searches ........................... 111
Center on GPS ................................. 242
Centering Routes on the Map ............. 220
Centering the Map.............................. 11
Centering the Map on an Address Book
Contact........................................ 119
Changing Draw Object Types ............. 159
Changing How POIs Display on the Map 67
Changing the Background Color of a
Printed Map .................................. 135
Changing the Map Colors.................... 65
Changing the Map Magnification .......... 66
Changing the Properties of a Stop ...... 213
Changing Voice Output ..................... 261
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats 15
Clear Trail ....................................... 243
Clearing a Profile .............................. 306
Climbing Distance ............................ 303
Climbing Elevation ........................... 303
Compass Rose .................................. 19
Connecting Data ............................... 87
Contours .......................................... 60
Control Panel .................................... 19
Convert tracks into trails ................... 175
Converting a Route to a GPS Log ........ 228
Converting MapTags to MapNotes ....... 114
Coordinate Formats ........................... 15
Coordinates ............................... 68, 246
Copying a Draw File.......................... 158
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw
File to Another .............................. 161
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File ...... 156
Copying and Pasting .......................... 12
Copying and Placing Draw Objects ...... 163
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard ...... 12
County Borders ................................. 60
Create Route from Line ..................... 161
Creating a New Custom Scheme ..... 79, 82
Creating a New Draw File .................. 146
Creating a New Symbol ..................... 190
Creating a New Symbol Set ............... 202
Creating a Profile ............................. 299
Creating a Route .............................. 205
Creating Transfer Files ....................... 92
Current Elevation ............................. 303
Cursor Position ................................ 202
Custom Points of Interest ................... 63
Custom Symbols .............................. 189
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme ......... 82
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences
................................................... 63
D
Data Corrections .............................. 319
Data Zoom Level ............................ 9, 19
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book
.................................................. 121
Deleting a Custom Scheme ................. 83
351
Topo USA User Guide
Deleting a Draw File ......................... 148
Deleting a Route .............................. 222
Deleting Draw Objects ...................... 158
Deleting Points and Line Segments from
Draw Objects ................................ 170
Deleting Your Entire Address Book ...... 123
Descending Distance ........................ 303
Descending Elevation ....................... 303
Dilution of Precision.......................... 247
Directions .........................126, 213, 215
Disable Screen Saver........................ 229
Display .................................. 65, 66, 67
Display Route Vias ........................... 216
Display Waypoint Labels ................... 216
Displaying Basic Map Features ............. 60
Displaying Routes on the Map ............ 220
Drag and Zoom .................................. 9
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym ............ 198
Draw .. 163, 164, 165, 166, 168, 169, 170,
214
Draw Layer ..................................... 141
Draw Tool Box ................................. 200
E
Easting ........................................... 303
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book
.................................................. 120
Editing a Route ................................ 217
Editing a Symbol .............................. 193
Editing Draw Objects ........................ 186
Editing Roads .................................. 219
Editing/Locking Draw Files................. 149
Elevation ........................... 19, 246, 306
Elevation Gain ................................. 303
Elevation Graphs.............................. 303
E-mailing a Transfer File ..................... 95
Enable GPS Voice Navigation ............. 229
Enable LED on GPS Device ................ 229
Enable WAAS Use ............................ 229
Entering Address Book Information..... 118
Estimate Fuel Breaks ........................ 226
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route 227
Exchange Wizard 289, 290, 291, 292, 293,
294
Exporting a Custom Scheme ................ 84
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files ....... 149
Exporting Tab Manager Preferences ...... 76
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX
Files ............................................ 151
Exporting Your Address Book ............. 123
F
FAQs ................................................. 2
352
File Preview ..................................... 244
Find ..... 97, 103, 104, 108, 114, 119, 122
Find Options ..................................... 97
Finding a Custom Symbol .................. 194
Finding a Symbol by Its Name ........... 108
Finding Points Near Your Current Location
.................................................. 104
Flying Over a 3-D Map ...................... 314
Formatting a Text File to Import as a
Draw File ..................................... 154
Fuel ............................................... 213
G
Game Management Districts ............... 60
Geocaching ...................... 265, 266, 267
Getting Back on Track....................... 242
Global Positioning System ................. 249
Glossary .......................................... 26
GPS .... 55, 104, 229, 241, 242, 243, 244,
245, 246, 249
GPS Options .................................... 229
GPS Voice Navigation ................257, 262
Grab and Pan ................................... 55
Grade ............................................. 303
Grids ............................................... 60
H
Heading .......................................... 246
Hidden Draw Tools ........................... 146
Hide Route ...................................... 220
Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map
.................................................. 117
Hiding Draw Files ............................. 148
Hiding Tabs ...................................... 75
Hiding Toolbar Buttons....................... 49
High-contrast Colors .......................... 65
Horizontal Resize Tool ........................ 71
I
Image ............................................. 12
Importing a Bitmap .......................... 195
Importing a Custom Scheme .............. 83
Importing Existing Address Book
Information .................................. 117
Importing Files to Draw Files ............. 151
Importing Routes ............................. 222
Importing Tab Manager Preferences ..... 60
Importing Transfer Files ..................... 94
Info ................................................ 52
Initializing GPS ................................ 229
Inserting Stops and Vias ................... 209
International Labels ........................... 60
Interval ........................................... 19
Index
J
N
Join tracks ...................................... 175
Joining Linear Objects....................... 180
JPEG ................................................ 12
K
NavMode ........................... 56, 233, 235
Netbook ............................. 55, 59, 297
NetLink ..................................... 87, 319
Northing ......................................... 303
O
Keyboard Shortcuts 79, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85,
314
Keywords for Category Searches ........ 111
L
Labeling a Draw Object ..................... 170
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote 219
Land Cover ....................................... 60
Large POI Symbols ............................. 67
Latitude .......................................... 303
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items
on a Printed Map ........................... 134
Legend ............................................. 43
Line .................................156, 172, 177
Linear Distance ................................ 303
Longitude ....................................... 303
M
Magnification ............................. 66, 229
Make Stop ...................................... 217
Make Via ........................................ 217
Map Center Crosshair ......................... 60
Map Colors ........................................ 65
Map Coordinates ................................ 19
Map Data .......................................... 87
Map Features .............................. 60, 63
Map Files ............................... 89, 90, 91
Map Legend ...................................... 43
Map Rotation Tool .............................. 19
MapNote ..... 184, 186, 187, 188, 219, 220
MapShare ................................. 50, 319
MapTags ......................................... 114
Maximum Elevation .......................... 303
Measure ..................................... 52, 68
Microphone .............................. 252, 262
Minimum Elevation ........................... 303
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information .. 247
Monitoring Speech Recognition .......... 252
Monitoring Your GPS Status ............... 246
Moving a Contact's Location On the Map
.................................................. 120
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw
File ............................................. 162
Moving and Deleting MapNotes .......... 220
Moving Draw Objects ........................ 164
Opening a Project ............................. 90
Opening a Symbol Set ...................... 203
Options Dialog Box 54, 60, 63, 65, 66, 67,
68, 79, 80, 82, 229, 262, 313
Overview Map ................................... 20
P
Panning the Map ........................ 11, 242
Parks or Reserves ............................. 60
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym ............... 197
Picture............................................. 12
Pitch .............................................. 311
Placing Draw Objects ........................ 163
Playing Back a Log File...................... 243
PN .................... 270, 276, 280, 281, 282
POI Search ...................................... 103
POIs ......................................... 60, 103
Polygon ........................... 181, 182, 183
Previewing a GPS Log File ..........244, 297
Print ...... 12, 57, 125, 126, 128, 132, 134,
135, 215
Print Maps with a Transparent Background
.................................................. 135
Print Maps With a Yellow/Black
Background .................................. 135
Profile ................. 53, 299, 300, 303, 306
Projects ...................................... 90, 91
Publicly Managed Lands ..................... 60
Q
QuickSearch .............................. 98, 108
R
Recalculate When Off Route ............... 229
Receiving a Route ............................ 270
Receiving a Track ............................. 270
Receiving Waypoints......................... 270
Recenter Map on GPS ................229, 242
Recognition Settings ......................... 262
Recreational Contacts ........................ 33
Rectangle......................... 181, 182, 183
Reference Card ................................. 85
Relocating Address Book Contacts ...... 121
Removing a Symbol.......................... 199
Renaming a Custom Scheme .............. 82
353
Topo USA User Guide
Renaming a Draw Object .................. 165
Reordering the Tabs ........................... 77
Reordering the Toolbar ....................... 49
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ........... 71
Reverse Route ................................. 217
Rotate Map in GPS Direction .............. 229
Routable Roads .................171, 177, 179
Routable Trails ..................171, 177, 179
Route ... 50, 209, 213, 217, 219, 220, 222,
226
Route Avoid .................................... 214
Route Directions .............................. 213
Route Prefs .............................. 216, 219
S
Satellites ................................. 247, 249
Save as GPS Log File ........................ 228
Saving a Draw File ........................... 147
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image
.................................................... 12
Saving a Route ................................ 156
Saving a Track as a GPS Log ............. 156
Saving Route Directions as Text ......... 215
Scale Bar .......................................... 19
Searching for Address Book Contacts .. 117
Searching For Commands.................... 84
Searching Tips ................................... 17
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme . 79
Sending Route Information ................ 270
Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device .... 270
Sending Waypoints .......................... 270
Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation
.................................................. 306
Setting Units of Measure Preferences .... 68
Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences ...... 313
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break
Preferences .................................. 226
Setting Your Routing Preferences ....... 216
Shaded Relief .................................... 60
Show All Commands .................. 252, 253
Show Comments MapNotes ............... 219
Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail ............. 229
Show Location MapNotes .................. 219
Show Summary MapNotes ................. 219
Show Turns ..................................... 213
Showing Address Book Contacts on the
Map ............................................ 122
Showing Tabs .................................... 75
Showing Toolbar Features ................... 49
Skyview.......................................... 247
Snapping Draw Objects ..................... 168
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your
Map ............................................ 133
354
Speech Profile Training ..............258, 262
Speech Recognition ........... 252, 258, 259
Speed ............................................ 246
Spline.............................. 172, 177, 179
Start GPS.................................229, 242
Statistical Data ................................ 303
Stops ............................................. 209
Street Colors .................................... 65
Strip Maps ...................................... 126
Sun/Moon ....................................... 249
Supported Coordinate Formats ............ 15
Symbol ....................................184, 189
T
Tab Configuration.................... 60, 71, 75
Tab Manager ............................... 75, 76
Terrain Distance .............................. 303
Text Label ........................ 184, 186, 187
Tips on Viewing Search Results .......... 109
Toolbar . 21, 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57
Topo Colors ...................................... 65
Town Borders ................................... 60
Track ......... 175, 241, 242, 270, 290, 293
Training the Speech Recognition Engine
.................................................. 258
Transfer File ........................... 92, 94, 95
Travel Package ................................ 126
Turn Details .................................... 126
U
Urban Area Color .............................. 60
Use Custom Map Features .................. 63
Use High-Contrast Colors .................. 229
USGS Quadrangle Coverage ............... 60
Using the Transparency Option .......... 200
V
Vertical Resize Tool ........................... 71
Vias ............................................... 209
Viewing a 3-D Map ........................... 311
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a
Scheme ........................................ 85
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log....... 245
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools................ 146
Viewing Route Directions ................... 213
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File .... 157
Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs ... 300
Viewing Two Maps Simultaneously ....... 73
Voice .......... 251, 252, 253, 258, 261, 262
W
Waypoint .... 151, 184, 186, 187, 291, 294
Index
X
XSym ...................................... 197, 198
Z
Zone .............................................. 303
Zoom Tools ................................... 9, 19
Zooming In and Out ............................ 9
ZIP/Postal Codes ............................... 60
355
Download PDF